2008 Saturn VUE Green Line Hybrid Owner Manual M
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About Driving Your Vehicle
Safety Warnings and Symbols
As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate
this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control
or an accident. Be sure to read the “on-pavement”
and “off-road” driving guidelines in this manual.
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. A box
with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that
could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning.
{CAUTION:
Using this Manual
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
Read this owner manual from beginning to end to
learn about the vehicle’s features and controls.
Pictures and words work together to explain things.
Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid
or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions.
Index
To quickly locate information about the vehicle use
the Index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical
list of what is in the manual and the page number
where it can be found.
A circle with a slash
through it is a safety
symbol which means
“Do Not,” “Do Not do
this” or “Do Not let this
happen.”
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Notices are also used in this manual.
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along
with the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that
could damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by the vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly.
The notice tells what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors
or in different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle which
use the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Head Restraints
The vehicle’s front and rear seats have adjustable
head restraints in the outboard seating positions.
{CAUTION:
With head restraints that are not installed and
adjusted properly, there is a greater chance
that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal
injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head
restraints for all occupants are installed
and adjusted properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s
head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury
in a crash.
1-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Pull the head restraint
up to raise it. To lower
the head restraint,
press the button,
located on the top
Push down on the head restraint after the button is
released to make sure that it is locked in place.
The vehicle’s head restraints are not designed to
be removed.
of the seatback, and
push the restraint down.
Active Head Restraint System
The vehicle has an active head restraint system in the
front outboard seating positions. These automatically
tilt forward to reduce the risk of neck injury if the vehicle
is hit from behind.
1-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To move a manual seat forward or rearward:
1. Lift the bar to unlock
Front Seats
the seat.
Manual Seats
2. Slide the seat to the
desired position and
release the bar.
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat
is locked in place.
1-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Seat Height Adjuster
Power Seat
a: To adjust the seat:
If your vehicle has a
manual driver seat height
adjuster, it is located
on the outboard side
of the seat near the
Move the seat
forward or rearward.
front of the seat cushion.
To raise the seat, move the lever upward repeatedly
until the seat is at the desired height. To lower the seat,
move the lever downward repeatedly until the seat is
at the desired height.
Raise or lower the
front or rear part
of the seat cushion.
1-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Lumbar
Heated Seats
On vehicles with heated front seats the controls are
located on the center console. To operate the heated
seats the engine must be running.
If your vehicle has this
feature, the knob is
located on the inboard
side of the driver’s
seatback.
M (Heated Seat): Press this button to turn on the
heated seat.
The light on the button will come on to indicate that the
feature is working. Press the button to cycle through
the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and
to turn the heat to the seat off. Indicator lights show
the level of heat selected: three for high, two for
medium, and one for low.
Turn the knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase
or decrease the lumbar support.
The passenger seat may take longer to heat up.
1-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
Driver’s Seat shown, Passenger Seat similar
{CAUTION:
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever on the outboard
side of the seat and move the seatback to the desired
position. Then release the lever to lock the seatback
in place. If the passenger’s seat is a flat folding
seat, fully raise the lever to disengage the seatback.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
1-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job because it
will not be against your body. Instead, it will
be in front of you. In a crash, you could go
into it, receiving neck or other injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a
crash, the belt could go up over your
abdomen. The belt forces would be there,
not at your pelvic bones. This could cause
serious internal injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety
belt properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
1-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
On vehicles with this feature, to fold the seatback:
1. Lower the head restraint all the way.
Passenger Folding Seatback
2. Lift the bar under the front of the seat to unlock it.
Slide the seat as far back as it will go and release
the bar. Try to move the seat back and forth to
make sure it is locked into place.
{CAUTION:
If you fold the seatback forward to carry longer
objects, such as skis, be sure any such cargo
is not near an airbag. In a crash, an inflating
airbag might force that object toward a person.
This could cause severe injury or even death.
Secure objects away from the area in which
an airbag would inflate. For more information,
{CAUTION:
Things you put on this seatback can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn,
or in a crash. Remove or secure all items
before driving.
3. Lift up fully on the recliner lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat, and fold the seatback
forward until it disengages.
1-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked in place.
The recliner lever is also used to recline the seatback
while a passenger is seated. See Manual Reclining
4. Continue to fold the seat forward until it locks in
the folded position.
5. Pull up on the seatback to be sure it is locked.
To raise the seatback, do the following:
Rear Seats
Split Folding Rear Seat
The rear split bench seatbacks can be folded forward,
upright, or partially reclined, independent of the
other seatback position.
1. Lift up fully on the recliner lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat, and push up on the
seatback.
2. Continue raising the seatback until the seatback
re-engages.
1-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To fold the seatback down:
Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts
still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the
safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts
and return them to their normal stowed position
before folding a rear seat.
1. Unbuckle all three safety belts and put the front
seatback in an upright position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there. Always
push and pull on the seatback to be sure it is
locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
2. Lift the lever located on the top of the seatback to
release the seatback and fold the seatback forward.
To recline the seatback:
1. Lift and hold the lever located on top of the seatback.
2. Tilt the seatback rearward, then release the lever.
1-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Safety Belts
{CAUTION:
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a safety belt properly.
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected
from it and be seriously injured or killed.
In the same crash, you might not be, if you
are buckled up. Always fasten your safety
belt, and check that your passenger(s) are
restrained properly too.
Your vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the
law requires wearing safety belts. Here is why:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a serious one.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not survive.
But most crashes are in between. In many of them, people
who buckle up can survive and sometimes walk away.
Without belts they could have been badly hurt or killed.
After more than 40 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up does
matter... a lot!
1-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in
a crash — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passenger(s) can be hurt. Being a
good driver does not protect you from things
beyond your control, such as bad drivers.
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But your chance of being conscious
during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle
and get out, is much greater if you are belted.
And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you
are upside down.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less
than 40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have
to wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they
work with safety belts — not instead of them.
Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants
still have to buckle up to get the most protection.
That is true not only in frontal collisions, but
especially in side and other collisions.
1-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This section is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
those rules for everyone’s protection.
It is very important for all occupants to buckle up.
Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often
in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts.
Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of
the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in
the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety
belt, there is important information you should know.
Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in
front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low
and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash,
this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you
would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid
under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The
shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the
chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt
restraining forces.
The shoulder belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash.
1-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit snugly against
your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as
much protection this way.
1-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is
too loose. In a crash, you could slide under
the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen.
This could cause serious or even fatal injuries.
The lap belt should be worn low and snug
on the hips, just touching the thighs.
A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as
much protection this way.
1-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen.
The belt forces would be there, not on the
pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones,
and that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder
belt should go over the shoulder and across
the chest.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by not wearing
the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash,
you would not be restrained by the shoulder
belt. Your body could move too far forward
increasing the chance of head and neck injury.
You might also slide under the lap belt. The
belt force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The shoulder belt should go over
the shoulder and across the chest.
A: The belt is behind the body.
1-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
All seating positions in your vehicle have a
lap-shoulder belt.
Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you
can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in
the Index.
2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of a passenger
belt out all the way, you may engage the child
restraint locking feature. If this happens, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if necessary.
Engaging the child restraint locking feature
may affect the passenger sensing system.
4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster,
move it to the height that is right for you. Improper
shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce
the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.
See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in
this section.
1-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way. When the
safety belt is not in use, slide the latch plate up
the safety belt webbing. The latch plate should rest
on the stitching on the safety belt, near the guide
loop on the side wall.
It may be necessary to pull stitching on the
safety belt through the latch plate to fully
tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants.
Before you close a door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
1-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster
Safety Belt Pretensioners
Your vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for
the driver and right front passenger.
Your vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front
outboard occupants. Although you cannot see them,
they are part of the safety belt assembly. They can
help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of
a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash
if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation
are met. And, if your vehicle has side impact airbags,
safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety
belts in a side crash or a rollover event.
Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the
belt is centered on your shoulder. The belt should
be away from your face and neck, but not falling
off your shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height
adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the
safety belt in a crash.
To move it up or down,
squeeze the release
buttons (A) together
and move the height
adjuster to the
Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in a
crash, you will need to get new ones, and probably other
new parts for your safety belt system. See Replacing
desired position.
After you move the height adjuster to where you
want it, try to move it up or down without squeezing
the release buttons to make sure it has locked into
position.
1-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outboard passenger
position in the rear seat. Here is how to install a
comfort guide to the safety belt:
1. Remove the guide from its storage location,
which is a pocket on the side of the seat.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The elastic cord must be under the belt and the
guide on top.
2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
1-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may
not provide the protection needed in a crash.
The person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described previously in this section. Make sure
that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the
belt edges together so that you can take them out of the
guide. Store the comfort guide in its storage location,
which is a pocket on the side of the seat.
1-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
Safety Belt Extender
If the safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it.
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer
will order you an extender. When you go in to order it,
take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the extender will
be long enough for you. To help avoid personal injury,
do not let someone else use it, and use it only for the seat
it is made to fit. The extender has been designed for
adults. Never use it for securing child seats. To wear it,
attach it to the regular safety belt. For more information,
see the instruction sheet that comes with the extender.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
1-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the
booster seat state the weight and height limitations for
that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder
belt until the child passes the below fit test:
Child Restraints
Older Children
• Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees
bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue.
If no, return to the booster seat.
• Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder
belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue.
If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide.
See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
information. If the shoulder belt still does not rest
on the shoulder, then return to the booster seat.
• Does the lap belt fit low and snug on the hips,
touching the thighs? If yes, continue.
If no, return to the booster seat.
• Can proper safety belt fit be maintained for
the length of the trip? If yes, continue.
If no, return to the booster seat.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
1-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
{CAUTION:
A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and
get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can
provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face
or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the
hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies
belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.
It should never be worn over the abdomen, which
could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries
in a crash.
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt cannot properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under
According to accident statistics, children and infants
are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating
positions than in the front seating positions.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
1-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. In a crash, the child would
not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The
child might slide under the lap belt. The belt
force would then be applied right on the
abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The child could also move too far
forward increasing the chance of head and
neck injury. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest.
1-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Children who are not restrained properly
can strike other people, or can be thrown out of
the vehicle. In addition, young children should not
use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone; they need
to use a child restraint.
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints.
In fact, the law in every state in the United States
and in every Canadian province says children up to
some age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
People should never hold an infant in their
arms while riding in a vehicle. An infant does
not weigh much — until a crash. During a
crash an infant will become so heavy it is
not possible to hold it. For example, in a
crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg)
infant will suddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg)
force on a person’s arms. An infant should
be secured in an appropriate restraint.
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle
and never allow children to play with the
safety belts.
1-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor
its airbag system is designed for them. Young
children and infants need the protection that
a child restraint system can provide.
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
{CAUTION:
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height,
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck.
This is necessary because a newborn infant’s
neck is weak and its head weighs so much
compared with the rest of its body. In a crash,
an infant in a rear-facing seat settles into
the restraint, so the crash forces can be
distributed across the strongest part of an
infant’s body, the back and shoulders.
Infants should always be secured in
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
appropriate infant restraints.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that
come with the restraint state the weight and
height limitations for a particular child restraint.
In addition, there are many kinds of restraints
available for children with special needs.
1-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Child Restraint Systems
{CAUTION:
A rear-facing infant
seat (A) provides
restraint with the
seating surface
against the back
of the infant.
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area
that is unprotected by any bony structure.
This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children should always be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
The harness system holds the infant in place and,
in a crash, acts to keep the infant positioned in
the restraint.
A forward-facing child
seat (B) provides
restraint for the child’s
body with the harness.
1-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing an Add-On Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
A booster seat can also help a child to see out
the window.
1-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in
a crash if the child is not properly secured
in the child restraint. Because there are
different systems, it is important to refer to
the instructions that come with the restraint.
Make sure the child is properly secured,
following the instructions that came with
that restraint.
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children and child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including: an infant or a
child riding in a rear-facing child restraint; a child riding
in a forward-facing child seat; an older child riding in
a booster seat; and children, who are large enough,
using safety belts.
1-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to
the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
for additional information.
If the vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, a rear-facing
child restraint should not be installed in the vehicle,
even if the airbag is off.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. Rear-facing child
restraints should be secured in a rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure to
secure the child restraint properly.
CAUTION: (Continued)
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move
around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people
in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child
restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it.
1-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving
or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the child
restraint that are made for use with the LATCH system.
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint is
properly installed using the anchors, or use the vehicle’s
safety belts to secure the restraint, following the
instructions that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual. When installing a child
restraint with a top tether, you must also use either the
lower anchors or the safety belts to properly secure the
child restraint. A child restraint must never be installed
using only the top tether and anchor.
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint that has LATCH attachments.
The child restraint manufacturer will provide you with
instructions on how to use the child restraint and its
attachments. The following explains how to attach a
child restraint with these attachments in your vehicle.
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
1-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some child restraints that have top tethers are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for your child restraint.
Top Tether Anchor
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Rear Seat
1-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To assist you in locating
the lower anchors, each
seating position with lower
anchors has two labels,
near the crease between
the seatback and the
seat cushion.
To assist you in locating
the top tether anchors, the
top tether anchor symbol
is located near the top
tether anchors.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top tether
must be attached.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
additional information.
The top tether anchors are located on the back of the
rear seatback. Be sure to use an anchor located on
the same side of the vehicle as the seating position
where the child restraint will be placed.
1-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors,
or use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure
the restraint, following the instructions
that came with that restraint, and also the
instructions in this manual.
1-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Folding an empty rear seat with the safety belts
secured may cause damage to the safety belt or
the seat. When removing the child restraint,
always remember to return the safety belts to
their normal, stowed position before folding
the rear seat.
{CAUTION:
Children can be seriously injured or strangled
if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their
neck and the safety belt continues to tighten.
Secure any unused safety belts behind the
child restraint so children cannot reach them.
Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the
retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has
one, after the child restraint has been installed.
Be sure to follow the instructions of the
child restraint manufacturer.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
Notice: Contact between the child restraint LATCH
attachment parts and the vehicle’s safety belt
assembly may cause damage to these parts. Make
sure when securing unused safety belts behind
the child restraint that there is no contact between
the child restraint LATCH attachment parts and
the vehicle’s safety belt assembly.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that
the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the
top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and
the following steps:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
over the seatback.
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, route the
tether over the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
dual tether, route the tether
around the headrest or
head restraint.
1-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
headrest or head restraint
and you are using a
single tether, raise the
headrest or head restraint
and route the tether
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-41 for how and where to install your child
restraint using LATCH. If you secure a child restraint
using a safety belt and it uses a top tether, see
on page 1-41 for top tether anchor locations.
under the headrest or head
restraint and in between
the headrest or head
restraint posts.
Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a
top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that
come with the child restraint say that the top strap must
be anchored.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
directions to be sure it is secure.
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Seat Position
When securing a child restraint in a rear seating
position, study the instructions that came with your child
restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH
system, you will be using the safety belt to secure
the child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow
the instructions that came with the child restraint.
Secure the child in the child restraint when and
as the instructions say.
1-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you need to install more than one child restraint in the
rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint
on page 1-39.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so you
would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly
if necessary.
1-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. If your child restraint has a top tether, follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding
the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for more information.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle
safety belt and let it return to the stowed position.
If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor,
disconnect it.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place
to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system which is designed to turn off the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
for more information on this, including important
safety information.
1-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
CAUTION: (Continued)
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the
front passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
for additional information.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though
it is turned off. Rear-facing child restraints
should be secured in a rear seat, even if
the airbag is off.
If your child restraint has the LATCH system, see
on page 1-41 for how to install your child restraint using
LATCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety
belt and it uses a top tether, see Lower Anchors
and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-41
for top tether anchor locations.
CAUTION: (Continued)
1-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top
tether anchor if a national or local law requires that
the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions
that come with the child restraint say that the top
strap must be anchored.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child
restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be
attached.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions
that came with the child restraint.
1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before
securing the forward-facing child restraint.
When the passenger sensing system has turned
off the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle.
page 3-30.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Make sure the release button is positioned so
you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if necessary.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and
shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt
through or around the restraint. The child
restraint instructions will show you how.
1-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint,
pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the
lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder
belt back into the retractor. If you are using a
forward-facing child restraint, you may find it helpful
to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
7. If your vehicle does not have a rear seat and your
child restraint has a top tether, follow the child
restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the
use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and
more information.
8. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the airbag is off, the off indicator in the passenger
airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when
the vehicle is started.
Airbag System
Your vehicle has the following airbags:
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
• A frontal airbag for the driver.
• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the driver.
• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for the
right front passenger.
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint
is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
• A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger
seated directly behind the driver.
• A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger
and the passenger seated directly behind the
right front passenger.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or
seat massagers before reinstalling or securing the
child restraint.
All of the airbags in your vehicle will have the word
AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label
near the deployment opening.
For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on
the middle part of the steering wheel for the driver and
on the instrument panel for the right front passenger.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle
and check with your dealer/retailer.
With seat-mounted side impact airbags, the word
AIRBAG will appear on the side of the seatback
closest to the door.
To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. If the top
tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it.
With roof-rail airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear
along the headliner or trim.
1-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a right front passenger seat,
the frontal passenger airbag is disabled. The frontal
passenger airbag is still in the vehicle, but it should not
deploy in a crash. Even if the airbag is disabled, do not
place cargo in front of this or any airbag.
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. All airbags are
designed to work with safety belts, but do
not replace them.
{CAUTION:
Be sure that cargo is not near an airbag.
In a crash, an inflating airbag might force
that object toward a person. This could cause
severe injury or even death. Secure objects
away from the area in which an airbag would
inflate. For more information, see Where
Airbags are designed to supplement the protection
provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags
are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury
from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must
inflate very quickly to do their job.
1-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Frontal airbags are designed to deploy in
moderate to severe frontal and near frontal
crashes. They are not designed to inflate in
rollover, rear crashes, or in many side crashes.
Airbags inflate with great force, faster than
the blink of an eye. Anyone who is up against,
or very close to, any airbag when it inflates
can be seriously injured or killed. Do not sit
unnecessarily close to the airbag, as you
would be if you were sitting on the edge of
your seat or leaning forward. Safety belts
help keep you in position before and during
a crash. Always wear your safety belt, even
with airbags. The driver should sit as far back
as possible while still maintaining control
of the vehicle.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are
designed to inflate in moderate to severe
crashes where something hits the side of
your vehicle. They are not designed to inflate
in frontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed
to inflate in moderate to severe crashes
where something hits the side of your vehicle,
during a vehicle rollover, or in a severe frontal
impact. They are not designed to inflate in
rear crashes.
Occupants should not lean on or sleep against
the door or side windows in seating positions
with seat-mounted side impact airbags and/or
roof-rail airbags.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
1-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer the
best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s
safety belt system nor its airbag system is
designed for them. Young children and infants
need the protection that a child restraint
system can provide. Always secure children
properly in your vehicle. To read how, see
There is an airbag
readiness light on
the instrument panel
cluster, which shows
the airbag symbol.
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
for more information.
1-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
The seat-mounted side impact airbags for the driver and
right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
1-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering.
Do not use seat accessories that block the
inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact
airbag.
Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar
If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags, never
secure anything to the roof of your vehicle by
routing the rope or tie down through any door
or window opening. If you do, the path of an
inflating roof-rail airbag will be blocked.
The roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger,
and second row outboard passengers are in the
ceiling above the side windows.
1-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the
potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or
right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they
are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a
predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment
thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is
likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and
help restrain the occupants.
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole), the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not
based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends
largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact,
and how quickly your vehicle slows down.
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
Thresholds can also vary with specific vehicle design.
1-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Frontal airbags are not intended to inflate during vehicle
rollovers, rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Seat-mounted side impact airbags are not intended to
inflate in frontal impacts, near-frontal impacts, rollovers,
or rear impacts. Roof-rail airbags are not intended to
inflate in rear impacts. A seat-mounted side impact
airbag is intended to deploy on the side of the vehicle
that is struck. Both roof-rail airbags will deploy when
either side of the vehicle is struck, or if the sensing
system predicts that the vehicle is about to roll over, or
in a severe frontal impact.
In addition, your vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags.
Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to
crash severity. Your vehicle has electronic frontal
sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe
frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage
airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment.
For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair costs
were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by
what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, and how
quickly the vehicle slows down. For seat-mounted
side impact and roof-rail airbags, deployment is
determined by the location and severity of the side
impact. In a rollover event, roof-rail airbag deployment
is determined by the direction of the roll.
Your vehicle has seat-mounted side impact and
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended
to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal
impact. Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s
designed threshold level. The threshold level can
vary with specific vehicle design.
1-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags supplement the protection provided by
safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of
the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper
body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
Seat-mounted side impact and roof-rail airbags
distribute the force of the impact more evenly over
the occupant’s upper body.
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In a deployment event, the sensing system sends
an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the
inflator. Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing
the bag to break out of the cover and deploy. The
inflator, the airbag, and related hardware are all
part of the airbag module.
Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help contain the head and chest of occupants in the
outboard seating positions in the first and second rows.
The rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to
help reduce the risk of full or partial ejection in rollover
events, although no system can prevent all such
ejections.
Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering
wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with
seat-mounted side impact airbags, there are airbag
modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to
the door. For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there
are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near
the side windows that have occupant seating positions.
But airbags would not help in many types of collisions,
primarily because the occupant’s motion is not
toward those airbags. See When Should an Airbag
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
inside of the vehicle.
Airbags should never be regarded as anything more
than a supplement to safety belts.
1-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
{CAUTION:
After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact
airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that
some people may not even realize an airbag inflated.
Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated
for some time after they deploy. Some components
of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes.
For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes
When an airbag inflates, there may be dust
in the air. This dust could cause breathing
problems for people with a history of asthma or
other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone
in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag
inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window
or a door. If you experience breathing problems
following an airbag deployment, you should
seek medical attention.
The parts of the airbag that come into contact with
you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may
be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in
the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent
the driver from seeing out of the windshield or being able
to steer the vehicle, nor does it prevent people from
leaving the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a feature that may automatically
unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn
the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate.
You can lock the doors, turn the interior lamps off,
and turn the hazard warning flashers off by using the
controls for those features. You must first, however,
turn your ignition key to the following ignition switch
positions:
1. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.
1-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many crashes severe enough to inflate the airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
Passenger Sensing System
If your vehicle has a right front passenger seat,
your vehicle has a passenger sensing system for
the right front passenger position. The passenger
airbag status indicator will be visible on the instrument
panel when you start your vehicle.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After an
airbag inflates, you will need some new parts for
the airbag system. If you do not get them, the airbag
system will not be there to help protect you in
another crash. A new system will include airbag
modules and possibly other parts. The service
manual for your vehicle covers the need to replace
other parts.
• Your vehicle has a crash sensing and diagnostic
module which records information after a crash.
United States
Canada
The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off,
will be visible during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible.
• Let only qualified technicians work on the airbag
systems. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver airbags are not part of the passenger
sensing system.
1-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors that
are part of the right front passenger seat and safety
belt. The sensors are designed to detect the presence
of a properly-seated occupant and determine if the
right front passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
We recommend that children be secured in a rear seat,
including: an infant or a child riding in a rear-facing
child restraint; a child riding in a forward-facing child
seat; an older child riding in a booster seat; and children,
who are large enough, using safety belts.
Even if the passenger sensing system has
turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though
it is turned off. Rear-facing child restraints
should be secured in a rear seat, even if the
airbag is off.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
If you secure a forward-facing child restraint
in the right front seat, always move the front
passenger seat as far back as it will go.
It is better to secure the child restraint in a
rear seat.
1-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle does not have a rear seat that will
accommodate a rear-facing child restraint, we
recommend that rear-facing child restraints not be
transported in your vehicle, even if the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint
following the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger frontal airbag if:
If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the
vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make sure that
the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child restraint
into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly recline
the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat cushion if
possible. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped
under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust
• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.
• The system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a child restraint.
• The system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat.
Remove any additional material from the seat such
as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters,
or seat massagers before reinstalling or securing
the child restraint.
• A right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time.
• The right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer. If no rear seat is
available, do not install a child restraint in this vehicle,
and check with your dealer/retailer.
• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off the
right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator
will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size
is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat.
1-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the passenger sensing system has allowed the
airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay
lit to remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off, remove any
additional material from the seat, such as blankets,
cushions, seat covers, seat heaters or seat massagers
and ask the person to place the seatback in the fully
upright position, then sit upright in the seat, centered on
the seat cushion, with the person’s legs comfortably
extended. Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for two to three minutes.
This will allow the system to detect that person and
then enable the right front passenger frontal airbag.
Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on
the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which
helps the passenger sensing system maintain the
passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and
“Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information
about the importance of proper restraint use.
1-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the belt out all
the way, you will engage the child restraint locking
feature. This may unintentionally cause the passenger
sensing system to turn the airbag(s) off for some
adult size occupants. If this happens, just let the belt
go back all the way and start again.
A thick layer of additional material, such as a blanket
or cushion, or aftermarket equipment such as seat
covers, seat heaters, and seat massagers can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
We recommend that you not use seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment other than any that GM
has approved for your specific vehicle. See Adding
page 1-68 for more information about modifications
that can affect how the system operates.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
1-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are parts of the airbag system in several places
around your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the
service manual have information about servicing your
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-14.
Q: Is there anything I might add to or change
about the vehicle that could keep the airbags
from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, height, front end or side
sheet metal, they may keep the airbag system from
working properly. Changing or moving any parts
of the front seats, safety belts, the airbag sensing
and diagnostic module, steering wheel, instrument
panel, roof-rail airbag modules, ceiling headliner
or pillar garnish trim, front sensors, side impact
sensors, rollover sensor module, or airbag wiring
can affect the operation of the airbag system.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is
turned off and the battery is disconnected,
an airbag can still inflate during improper
service. You can be injured if you are close
to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow
connectors. They are probably part of the
airbag system. Be sure to follow proper
service procedures, and make sure the person
performing work for you is qualified to do so.
1-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In addition, your vehicle has a passenger sensing
system for the right front passenger’s position,
which includes sensors that are part of the
passenger’s seat. The passenger sensing system
may not operate properly if the original seat
trim is replaced with non-GM covers, upholstery
or trim, or with GM covers, upholstery or trim
designed for a different vehicle. Any object,
such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort
enhancing pad or device, installed under or on
top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with
the operation of the passenger sensing system.
This could either prevent proper deployment of
the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger
sensing system from properly turning off the
passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing
If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see
Different Size Tires and Wheels on page 5-62
for additional important information.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my airbag system?
A: If you have questions, call Customer Assistance.
The phone numbers and addresses for Customer
Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer
Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See
In addition, your dealer/retailer and the service manual
have information about the location of the airbag
sensors, sensing and diagnostic module and airbag
wiring.
If you have any questions about this, you should
contact Customer Assistance before you modify
your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses
for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of
the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual.
1-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbags
Restraint System Check
The airbag system does not need regularly scheduled
maintenance or replacement. Make sure the airbag
readiness light is working. See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more information.
Checking the Restraint Systems
Safety Belts
Notice: If an airbag covering is damaged, opened,
or broken, the airbag may not work properly.
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
If there are any opened or broken airbag covers,
have the airbag covering and/or airbag module
replaced. For the location of the airbag modules,
See your dealer/retailer for service.
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder
light and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,
retractors and anchorages are working properly.
Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt
system parts. If you see anything that might keep a
safety belt system from doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working.
information.
Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety
1-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle has the LATCH system and it was
being used during a crash, you may need new LATCH
system parts.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the
belt or LATCH system (if equipped), was not being
used at the time of the crash.
{CAUTION:
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
Have your safety belt pretensioners checked if your
vehicle has been in a crash, if your airbag readiness
light stays on after you start your vehicle, or while you
If you have been in a collision in which either side
of your vehicle has been hit, the vehicle’s sensing
system may alert the automatic battery disconnect to
open. The battery will disconnect. The electrical
power to the vehicle will be off and the vehicle will not
start. The airbag readiness light will come on. See
vehicle, the automatic battery disconnect must be
reconnected by a qualified service technician and
sensing system parts will need to be replaced.
Have your vehicle serviced right away.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system (if equipped) parts?
After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary.
But the belt assemblies that were used during any
crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your
dealer/retailer to have your safety belt assemblies
inspected or replaced.
1-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
1-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 2
Features and Controls
2-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons, children
or others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function with the keys in the
ignition and they could be seriously injured
or killed if caught in the path of a closing
window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
The two keys can be used for the ignition and all locks.
The key code is stamped on the key number plate and
can be used to make new keys at any dealer/retailer.
Store this information in a safe place outside your vehicle.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
If you are locked out of your vehicle, contact Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
2-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System
If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range,
try this:
If this vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system, it operates on a radio frequency subject
to Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
Rules and with Industry Canada.
• Check the distance. The transmitter may be too
far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy
or snowy weather.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may
be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to the
left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
• Check the transmitter’s battery. See “Battery
Replacement” later in this section.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
• If the transmitter is still not working correctly,
see your dealer/retailer or a qualified technician
for service.
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
2-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Q (Lock): Press Q to lock all the doors, including
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
System Operation
The vehicle’s doors can be locked and unlocked from
about 3 feet (1 m) up to 65 feet (20 m) away with
the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter.
the liftgate.
" (Unlock): Press " to unlock the driver’s door. If " is
pressed again within five seconds, all other doors will
unlock. The interior lamps will come on for 20 seconds
or until the ignition is turned on.
There are other conditions which can affect the
performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless
L (Vehicle Locator/Panic Alarm): Press and
release L to activate the alarm. The turn signal lamps
will flash and the horn will sound three times.
Press and hold L for more than two seconds and the
turn signal lamps will flash and the horn will sound
for 30 seconds.
To turn the alarm off, press L again or turn the
ignition to ON/RUN.
2-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Matching Transmitter(s) to Your
Vehicle
Each RKE transmitter is coded to prevent another
transmitter from unlocking your vehicle. If a transmitter is
lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased through
your dealer/retailer. All transmitters need to be re-coded
to match the new transmitters. The lost transmitter will
no longer work after the new transmitters are re-coded.
Up to eight transmitters can be matched.
To match a new transmitter, see “HOLD STEM TO
RELEARN REMOTE KEY” under DIC Operation and
Battery Replacement
To replace the battery:
Replace the battery if the REPLACE BATTERY IN
REMOTE KEY message displays on the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
1. Separate the halves of the transmitter with a flat
thin object inserted into the notch on the side.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not to
touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
2. Remove the old battery. Do not use a metal object.
3. Insert the new battery, positive side facing down.
Replace with a CR2032 or equivalent battery.
4. Put the transmitter back together tightly.
2-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lock or unlock the driver’s door, use the key from the
outside or the door lock from the inside.
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
Power Door Locks
T: The power door lock switches are located on the
{CAUTION:
driver’s door.
• To unlock the doors, press the right side of the
switch.
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers, especially children, can easily
open the doors and fall out of a moving
vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle
will not open it. You increase the chance of
being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash if
the doors are not locked. So, wear safety
belts properly and lock the doors whenever
you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Remove the ignition key and press the left side of
the switch to lock all of the doors.
Delayed Locking
A chime will sound to indicate a door or liftgate is open
when you try to lock the doors with the power door lock
switch. The doors will not lock, and the theft-deterrent
system will not arm until all the doors are closed and
five seconds have passed.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or stop
your vehicle. Locking your doors can help
prevent this from happening.
2-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Door Security Locks
Lockout Protection
Your vehicle has rear door security locks to prevent
passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside.
When you press the power door lock switch with the
key in the ignition, and any door is open, all the doors
lock and the driver’s door unlocks. When doors are
closed with the key in the ignition, the horn will sound
as a reminder.
Open the rear doors to
access the security locks
on the inside edge of
each door.
If you lock the doors with the remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter, and the key is in the ignition, a chime
sounds and all except the driver’s door lock.
The lockout protection feature can be overridden by
holding the power door lock switch for three seconds.
To set the locks, insert a key into the slot and turn it to
the horizontal position. The door can only be opened from
the outside with the door unlocked. To return the door to
normal operation, turn the slot to the vertical position.
2-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To lock or unlock the liftgate, press the button on the
Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter twice or
the power door lock switch.
Liftgate
To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the
underside of the liftgate handle and pull up.
{CAUTION:
To close the liftgate, pull down using the handle and
close until it latches.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate or
liftglass open because carbon monoxide (CO)
gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see
or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and
even death. If you must drive with the liftgate
open or if electrical wiring or other cable
connections must pass through the seal
Liftgate Operation with Loss of Power
To open the liftgate if
the vehicle’s battery is
disconnected or the voltage
is low, access the release
lever.
between the body and the liftgate or liftglass:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your climate control system
to its highest speed and select the control
setting that will force outside air into your
vehicle. See “Climate Control System” in
the Index.
• If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
Remove the interior trim cover on the inside of the
liftgate. Use a tool to push the lever on the latch until
the liftgate releases.
2-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
2-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The window switches for
all doors are located on
the driver’s door.
Power Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is
dangerous for many reasons, children or
others could be badly injured or even killed.
They could operate the power windows or
other controls or even make the vehicle move.
The windows will function and they could be
seriously injured or killed if caught in the path
of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a
vehicle with children.
Each door also has a switch for its own window.
To open a window, pull up on the switch. To close a
window, press the switch.
The power windows operate when the ignition is in
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY, or while in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory
When there are children in the rear seat use
the window lockout button to prevent
unintentional operation of the windows.
2-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Express-Down Window
Sun Visors
The driver’s window switch has an express-down
feature that allows the window to be lowered without
holding the switch. Press the switch part way, and
the driver’s window will open a small amount. Press the
switch down all the way and release it and the window
will go down automatically.
To block out glare, swing the sun visor down. You
can also detach the driver’s sun visor from the center
mount and slide it along the rod from side-to-side
for greater coverage.
Visor Vanity Mirrors
To stop the window while it is lowering, press and
release the switch.
On vehicles with covered visor vanity mirrors, pull down
the sun visor to access the vanity mirror.
Window Lockout
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirrors
On vehicles with lighted visor vanity mirrors, pull down
the sun visor to access the vanity mirror. The lights
will come on when you lift the cover.
o (Window Lockout): Your vehicle has a lockout
feature to prevent rear seat passengers from operating
the windows. Press the lockout button, located with the
power window switches, to turn the feature on and off.
2-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 seconds and then flashes slowly. If the lock button
on the RKE transmitter is pressed a second time,
the theft-deterrent system will activate immediately,
bypassing the 30 second delay. The content theft
deterrent alarm is not armed until the security light
flashes slowly.
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however,
they do not make it impossible to steal.
If any door or the liftgate are opened without using the
key or pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter,
the exterior lamps flash and the horn will sound for about
30 seconds. If the lock or unlock button on the RKE
transmitter is not pressed, the alarm sounds and
periodically repeats. If the system does not operate as
described above, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm
system.
The security light is
located near the center of
the instrument panel.
The theft-deterrent system also activates if you lock the
doors with a key.
To avoid setting off the alarm by accident, always
unlock a door with the RKE transmitter or a key.
Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm
if the system has been armed.
United States shown,
Canada similar
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm by
pressing lock or unlock on the RKE transmitter or by
placing the key in the ignition and turning it to START.
To arm the theft-deterrent system, close all doors and
press the lock button on the RKE transmitter. The
security light will come on solid for approximately
2-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer
The PASS-Key® III+ system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
Testing the Alarm
To test the alarm:
1. From inside the vehicle, lower the driver’s window
and open the driver’s door.
2. Get out of the vehicle, close the door and activate
the system by locking the doors with the RKE
transmitter.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. Wait for the security light to flash slowly.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
4. Then reach in through the window, unlock the door
with the manual door lock and open the door.
This should set off the alarm.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
If the alarm does not sound when it should, but the
vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see if the horn
works. The horn fuse may be blown. To replace the
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, see your dealer/retailer for service.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
PASS-Key® III+ uses a radio frequency transponder in
the key that matches a decoder in the vehicle.
2-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PASS-Key® III+ Electronic
Immobilizer Operation
Your vehicle has PASS-Key® III+ (Personalized
Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system.
PASS-Key® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system.
If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to
be not damaged, wait about five minutes and try another
ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check
If the engine still does not start with the other key, your
vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first
key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can
service the PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance.
The system is automatically armed when the key
is removed from the ignition.
You do not have to manually arm or disarm the system.
It is possible for the PASS-Key® III+ decoder to “learn”
the transponder value of a new or replacement key.
Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle.
The following procedure is for programming additional
keys only. If all the currently programmed keys are
lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer
or a locksmith who can service PASS-Key® III+ to
have keys made and programmed to the system.
The security light will come on if there is a problem
with arming or disarming the theft-deterrent system.
When the PASS-Key® III+ system senses that someone
is using the wrong key, it prevents the vehicle from
starting. Anyone using a trial-and-error method to start
the vehicle will be discouraged because of the high
number of electrical key codes.
When trying to start the vehicle if the engine does not
start and the security light on the instrument panel
cluster comes on, there may be a problem with your
theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again.
See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut
exactly as the ignition key that operates the system.
2-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To program the new key:
Starting and Operating Your
Vehicle
1. Verify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it.
2. Insert the already programmed key in the ignition
and start the engine. If the engine will not start,
see your dealer/retailer for service.
New Vehicle Break-In
3. After the engine has started, turn the key to
LOCK/OFF, and remove the key.
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
4. Insert the key to be programmed and turn it to the
ON/RUN position within five seconds of the original
key being turned to the LOCK/OFF position.
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake or slow the vehicle.
The security light will turn off once the key has
been programmed.
5. Repeat Steps 1 through 4 if additional keys are to
be programmed.
If you lose or damage your PASS-Key® III+ key, see
your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service
PASS-Key® III+ to have a new key made.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time the new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops
with new linings can mean premature wear and
earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in
guideline every time you get new brake linings.
Do not leave the key or device that disarms or
deactivates the theft deterrent system in the vehicle.
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
2-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ACC (ACC/ACCESSORY): This position operates
some of the electrical accessories, such as the radio,
but not the climate control system.
Ignition Positions
The ignition switch can be
turned to four different
positions with the key.
Use ACC/ACCESSORY if you must have your vehicle
in motion while the engine is off, for example, if your
vehicle is being pushed or towed.
ON/RUN: This is the position the switch returns after
you start the engine and release the key. The switch
stays in ON/RUN when the engine is running. But even
when the engine is not running, you can use ON/RUN
to operate the electrical accessories, and to display
some instrument panel warning lights.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine
off. You may not be able to start your vehicle if the battery
is allowed to drain for an extended period of time.
To shift out of PARK (P), the ignition must be in
ON/RUN and the brake pedal must be pressed.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is in all the way. If
none of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
START: This position starts the engine. When the
engine starts, release the key. The switch returns to
ON/RUN for normal driving. Do not turn the key to
START if the engine is running.
LOCK/OFF: This position locks the steering wheel,
ignition, shift lever and transmission. This is the
only position in which you can insert or remove the key.
If the steering wheel is locked, move it from right to
left and turn the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If none
of this works, then your vehicle needs service.
Even if the engine is not running, ACC/ACCESSORY
and ON/RUN allow you to operate electrical accessories,
such as the radio.
2-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Key In the Ignition
Starting the Engine (Automatic
Engine Start/Stop)
Never leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as it is an
easy target for joy riders or thieves. If you leave the key in
the ignition and park your vehicle, a chime will sound,
when you open the driver’s door. Always remember to
remove your key from the ignition and take it with you.
This will lock your ignition and transmission. Also, always
remember to lock the doors.
Place the transmission in the proper gear.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position -- this
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
The battery could be drained if you leave the key in the
ignition while your vehicle is parked. You may not be
able to start your vehicle after it has been parked for an
extended period of time.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the
transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
These vehicle accessories may be used for up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned off:
• Outside Mirror
• Power Windows
• Radio
All these features work when the ignition key is in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY positions, until a door is
opened.
2-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,
especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or −18°C),
it could be flooded with too much gasoline. Try
pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor
and holding it there as you hold the key in START
for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least
15 seconds between each try, to allow the cranking
motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of
the key and accelerator. If the vehicle starts briefly
but then stops again, repeat the procedure. This
clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not
race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate
the engine and transmission gently until the oil
warms up and lubricates all moving parts.
Starting Procedure
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as
your engine gets warm. Do not race the engine
immediately after starting it. Operate the engine
and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm
up and lubricate all moving parts.
Your vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking
System. This feature assists in starting the engine
and protects components. If the ignition key is turned
to the START position, and then released when the
engine begins cranking, the engine will continue
cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts.
If the engine does not start and the key is held in
START for many seconds, cranking stops after
15 seconds to prevent cranking motor damage.
To prevent gear damage, this system also prevents
cranking if the engine is already running. Engine
cranking can be stopped by turning the ignition
switch to the ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF
position.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer/retailer. If you do not, your
engine might not perform properly. Any resulting
damage would not be covered by your vehicle’s
warranty.
Notice: Cranking the engine for long periods of
time, by returning the key to the START position
immediately after cranking has ended, can overheat
and damage the cranking motor, and drain the
battery. Wait at least 15 seconds between each
try, to let the cranking motor cool down.
2-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an automatic engine start/stop feature
that is a hybrid operation. After the engine is started
and has reached operating temperature, the AUTO
STOP feature may turn the engine off when you apply
the brakes and come to a complete stop. When you take
your foot off the brake pedal or press the accelerator
pedal, the engine will start. The engine will continue
to run until the next AUTO STOP.
Automatic Engine Start/Stop
{CAUTION:
There is something about your vehicle that can
make it move suddenly, and you or others can
be seriously injured. This can happen if the
vehicle is in the Auto Stop mode, and the shift
lever is in DRIVE (D). Because your vehicle has
the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, your
vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off
when you come to a complete stop. However,
if you then start to exit the vehicle, as soon as
you take your foot off the brake pedal, the
engine will start again and the vehicle can
move forward. If you are going to exit your
vehicle, first shift to PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF. Then exit.
The AUTO STOP mark on the tachometer indicates
that the engine is in AUTO STOP mode. If the driver’s
door is opened while in AUTO STOP mode, a chime will
sound.
If you are on an incline, your vehicle may roll backwards
a short distance until the engine performs an AUTO
START. The Hill Start Assist feature will help start the
vehicle on a moderate or steep incline. To restart the
engine during the AUTO STOP, release the brake
pedal or press the accelerator pedal. The engine
starts immediately. The vehicle continues to run
until the next stop.
There are several conditions that may prevent an AUTO
STOP or cause an AUTO START.
2-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Engine Will Remain Running When:
• The engine, transmission, or hybrid battery is
not warmed up yet.
The Engine Will Restart When:
• The brake pedal is released.
• The accelerator pedal is applied.
• The outside temperature is high — usually above
95°F (35°C) and the climate control system is
working to cool the vehicle in A/C mode (yellow light
illuminated on A/C button) or if defrost is selected.
page 3-18 for more information.
• When shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P),
REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N), MANUAL MODE (M)
the engine will restart immediately.
• If the A/C button (green light illuminated on A/C)
button is selected, the duration of the AUTO
STOP will depend on the outside temperature.
This economy mode improves fuel economy
by limiting the effects of the air conditioning.
The warmer it is outside, the shorter the time before
the engine is restarted to provide cabin cooling.
• The shift lever is in PARK (P), REVERSE (R),
NEUTRAL (N), MANUAL MODE (M).
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low.
• The 12V vehicle battery charge is low, or loads
are high.
• The climate control system is turned from Off to
On (econ or normal A/C, or floor/ defog/defrost). See
more information.
• The hood is not fully closed.
• The engine is required to run for either heater or
climate control performance. See “Air Conditioning
and Engine Start/Stop” under Automatic Climate
• The hybrid battery pack charge is low and requires
recharging.
• Auto Stop time is greater than two minutes.
2-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Heater
{CAUTION:
The engine coolant heater, if available, can help in cold
weather conditions at or below 0°F (−18°C) for easier
starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Plug in the coolant heater at least four hours before
starting your vehicle. An internal thermostat in the
plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent
engine coolant heater operation at temperatures
above 0° F (−18° C).
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will
not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The
engine coolant heater cord is located near the air
cleaner box on the passenger side of the engine
compartment. See Engine Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for more information on location.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things. Instead of
trying to list everything here, we ask that you contact your
dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking your
vehicle. The dealer/retailer can give you the best advice
for that particular area.
3. Plug the cord into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC
outlet.
2-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic Transmission Operation
If your vehicle has an automatic transmission, the
{CAUTION:
shift lever is located on the console between the seats.
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if the
shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
There are several different
positions for the automatic
transmission.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into PARK (P)
on page 2-27. If you are pulling a trailer,
PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. It is
the best position to use when you start your engine
because your vehicle cannot move easily.
Make sure the shift lever is fully in PARK (P) before
starting the engine. Your vehicle has an automatic
transmission shift lock control system. You have to fully
apply your regular brakes first and then press the shift
lever button before you can shift from PARK (P) when the
ignition key is in RUN. If you cannot shift out of PARK (P),
ease pressure on the shift lever and push the shift lever
all the way into PARK (P) as you maintain brake
application. Then press the shift lever button and move
the shift lever into another gear. See Shifting Out of
2-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of snow,
ice or sand without damaging your transmission, see If
page 4-21.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your vehicle is being towed.
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
2-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving with
the automatic transmission. It provides the best
fuel economy for your vehicle. If you need more
power for passing, and you are:
Manual Shift Mode (MSM)
(Automatic Transmission)
To use this feature, do the following:
• Going less than about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator pedal about halfway down.
1. Move the shift lever from DRIVE (D) rearward to the
MANUAL MODE (M).
The display will show a 3 for third gear.
When coming to a stop in the manual position, the
vehicle will automatically shift to FIRST (1) gear.
• Going about 35 mph (55 km/h), push your
accelerator all the way down.
Downshifting the transmission in slippery road conditions
could result in skidding, see “Skidding” under Loss of
2. Press the plus (+) button to upshift or the minus (−)
button to downshift.
While driving in MSM, the vehicle will have sportier
performance. Use this when you want the vehicle to
stay in gear longer or to downshift for more power
or engine braking.
MANUAL (M): This position allows you to change gears
similar to a manual transmission. If your vehicle has
this feature, see Manual Shift Mode.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle
in one place on a hill using only the accelerator
pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will
not be covered by your warranty. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill,
use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
The transmission will only allow you to shift into a gear
range appropriate for the vehicle speed.
• The transmission will not automatically shift to
the next higher gear range without pressing
the button on the shifter handle.
• The transmission will not allow shifting to the next
lower gear if the vehicle speed is too high.
If the vehicle does not respond to a gear change, or
detects a problem with the transmission, the range
of gears may be reduced and the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-36.
2-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To release the parking brake, hold the brake pedal
down. Pull the parking brake lever up until you can press
the release button. Hold the release button in as you
move the brake lever all the way down.
Parking Brake
Release the parking brake before driving the vehicle.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure
that the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
Regenerative Braking
Regenerative braking takes some of the energy from the
moving vehicle and turns it back into electrical energy.
This energy is then stored back into the vehicle’s hybrid
battery system, contributing to increased fuel efficiency.
The parking brake lever is located to the right of the
driver’s seat.
The system works whenever you take your foot off the
accelerator pedal while your vehicle is moving in a
forward gear. This causes your vehicle to slow down
slightly faster. It may feel like the brake pedal is
being pressed, even when it is not.
To set the parking brake, hold the brake pedal down
and pull up on the parking brake lever. If the ignition is
on, the brake system warning light will come on.
2-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
Shifting Into PARK (P)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle will
not move, even when you are on fairly level
ground, use the steps that follow. If you are
page 4-31.
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle with
the engine running. Your vehicle could move
suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine
running, be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and your
parking brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you
have moved the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the
regular brake pedal down. Then, see if you can move the
shift lever away from PARK (P) without first pressing the
button on the console shift lever. If you can, it means that
the shift lever was not fully locked into PARK (P).
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your foot and set
for more information.
2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by pressing the
button on the shift lever and pushing the lever all
the way toward the front of the vehicle.
3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF.
4. Remove the key and take it with you. If you can
leave your vehicle with the key, your vehicle is
in PARK (P).
2-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Torque Lock
Shifting Out of PARK (P)
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of the
vehicle may put too much force on the parking pawl
in the transmission. You may find it difficult to pull
the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torque
lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking brake
and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you leave
the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting Into
This vehicle has an electronic shift lock release system.
The shift lock release is designed to:
• Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever
is in PARK (P) with the shift lever button fully
released, and
• Prevent movement of the shift lever out of
PARK (P), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN
and the regular brake pedal is applied.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out of
PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
The shift lock release is always functional except in the
case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt)
battery.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have another
vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of the
pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
If your vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery
with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the
information.
2-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To shift out of PARK (P) use the following:
1. Apply the brake pedal.
Engine Exhaust
2. Press the shift lever button.
{CAUTION:
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
If you still are unable to shift out of PARK (P):
1. Fully release the shift lever button.
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
2. Hold the brake pedal down and press the shift lever
button again.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
3. Move the shift lever to the desired position.
• The exhaust system sounds strange or
If you still cannot move the shift lever from PARK (P),
consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing
service.
different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over road
debris.
Parking Over Things That Burn
• Repairs were not done correctly.
{CAUTION:
• Your vehicle or the exhaust system has
been modified improperly.
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
• Drive it only with all the windows down to
blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
2-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Running the Vehicle While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you
ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust into
your vehicle. See the earlier caution under
{CAUTION:
There is something about your vehicle that can
make it move suddenly, and you or others can
be seriously injured. This can happen if the
vehicle is in the Auto Stop mode, and the shift
lever is in DRIVE (D). Because your vehicle has
the Automatic Engine Start/Stop feature, your
vehicle’s engine might seem to be shut off
when you come to a complete stop. However,
if you then start to exit the vehicle, as soon as
you take your foot off the brake pedal, the
engine will start again and the vehicle can
move forward. If you are going to exit your
vehicle, first shift to PARK (P) and turn the
ignition to LOCK/OFF. Then exit.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle even if
the climate control fan is at the highest setting.
One place this can happen is a garage.
Exhaust — with CO — can come in easily.
NEVER park in a garage with the engine
running.
Also see “If You Are Caught in a Blizzard”
2-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have left
the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set the parking brake and move the shift lever
to PARK (P).
If the vehicle has the manual rearview mirror, it can be
adjusted by holding the mirror in the center to move
it for a clearer view of behind your vehicle. Reduce the
glare of headlamps from behind by pushing the lever
forward or pulling it back for daytime/nighttime use.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
If the vehicle has the automatic dimming rearview
mirror, it can be adjusted by holding the mirror in the
center to move it up or down and side to side.
Press and hold the button, located on the mirror,
for about three seconds to turn the automatic dimming
feature on or off. The indicator light comes on when
this feature is active. The automatic dimming feature
turns on each time the vehicle is started.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will not
If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling a trailer,
2-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Outside Power Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
The outside power mirror
control is located on the
driver side door.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
The passenger side mirror is convex shaped. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so more can be seen from
the driver seat. It also makes things, like other vehicles,
look farther away than they really are.
1. Turn the knob to the left (L) for the driver side
mirror and to the right (R) for the passenger
side mirror.
2. Adjust each mirror so that you can see the side of
your vehicle and the area behind your vehicle.
Outside Heated Mirrors
3. Turn the control to the center position so the mirror
cannot be moved.
Your vehicle may have this feature. When you operate
the rear window defogger, the defogger also warms the
heated driver’s and passenger’s outside rearview mirrors
to help clear them of ice, snow and condensation.
2-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar® System
OnStar service is provided to you subject to the OnStar
Terms and Conditions. You may cancel your OnStar
service at any time by contacting OnStar. A complete
OnStar Owner’s Guide and the OnStar Terms and
Conditions are included in the vehicle’s OnStar
Subscriber glove box literature. For more information,
visit onstar.com or onstar.ca, contact OnStar
at 1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827) or TTY
1-877-248-2080, or press the OnStar button to speak
with an OnStar advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Not all OnStar features are available on all vehicles.
To check if your vehicle is equipped to provide the
services described below, or for a full description of
OnStar services and system limitations, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide in your glove box or visit onstar.com.
OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live
advisors to provide you with a wide range of safety,
security, information, and convenience services. If your
airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an
automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can
request emergency services be sent to your location.
If you lock your keys in the vehicle, call OnStar at
1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal to unlock
your doors. If you need roadside assistance, press
the OnStar button and they can contact Roadside
Service for you.
OnStar Services
For new vehicles with OnStar, the Safe & Sound Plan,
or the Directions & Connections Plan is included for
one year from the date of purchase. You can extend
this plan beyond the first year, or upgrade to the
Directions & Connections Plan. For more information,
press the OnStar button to speak with an advisor. Some
OnStar services (such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen
Vehicle Location Assistance) may not be available until
you register with OnStar.
2-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Available Services with Safe & Sound Plan
OnStar Hands-Free Calling
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
OnStar Hands-Free Calling allows eligible OnStar
subscribers to make and receive calls using voice
commands. Hands-Free Calling is fully integrated
into the vehicle, and can be used with OnStar Pre-Paid
Minute Packages. Hands-Free Calling may also be linked
to a Verizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a Bell
Mobility service plan in Canada, depending on eligibility.
To find out more, refer to the OnStar Owner’s Guide
in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca, or speak with an OnStar advisor by
pressing the OnStar button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827).
• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN)
(If equipped)
• Link to Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• OnStar Vehicle Diagnostics
• GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics
OnStar Virtual Advisor
• OnStar Hands-Free Calling with
30 complimentary minutes
OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar
Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutes to access
location-based weather, local traffic reports, and stock
quotes. By pressing the phone button and giving a few
simple voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more
information (Only available in the continental U.S.).
• OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)
Available Services included with
Directions & Connections Plan
• All Safe and Sound Plan Services
• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered or OnStar
Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)
• RideAssist
• Information and Convenience Services
2-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OnStar Steering Wheel Controls
How OnStar Service Works
Your vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can
be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling.
for more information.
Your vehicle’s OnStar system has the capability
of recording and transmitting vehicle information.
This information is automatically sent to an OnStar
Call Center at the time of an OnStar button press,
Emergency button press or if your airbags or AACN
system deploys. The vehicle information usually includes
your GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional
information regarding the accident that your vehicle has
been involved in (e.g. the direction from which your
vehicle was hit). When you use the Virtual Advisor feature
of OnStar Hands-Free Calling, your vehicle also sends
OnStar your GPS location so that we can provide you
with location-based services.
On some vehicles, you may have to hold the button
for a few seconds and give the command “ONSTAR” to
activate the OnStar Hands-Free Calling. OnStar voice
command does not work unless Personal Calling is
activated. To activate Personal Calling, see the OnStar
Owner’s Guide.
On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to
dial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dial phone
extensions. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for
more information.
OnStar service cannot work unless your vehicle is in a
place where OnStar has an agreement with a wireless
service provider for service in that area. OnStar service
also cannot work unless you are in a place where the
wireless service provider OnStar has hired for that area
has coverage, network capacity and reception when the
service is needed, and technology that is compatible
with the OnStar service. Not all services are available
everywhere, particularly in remote or enclosed areas,
or at all times.
2-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Location information about your vehicle is only available
if the GPS satellite signals are unobstructed and
available.
Universal Home Remote
System
The Universal Home Remote System provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held Radio-Frequency (RF)
transmitters used to activate devices such as garage
door openers, security systems, and home lighting.
Your vehicle must have a working electrical system
(including adequate battery power) for the OnStar
equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar
cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing
OnStar service to you at any particular time or place.
Some examples are damage to important parts of your
vehicle in an accident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels,
weather or wireless phone network congestion.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Your Responsibility
Increase the radio volume if you cannot hear the OnStar
advisor. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, this
means that your system is not functioning properly and
should be checked by your dealer/retailer. If the light
appears clear (no light is appearing), your OnStar
subscription has expired. You can always press the
OnStar button to confirm that your OnStar equipment
is active.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming
the Universal Home Remote.
Universal Home Remote System
Operation (With One Triangular LED)
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future Universal Home Remote
programming. It is also recommended that upon the
sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal Home
Remote buttons should be erased for security purposes.
See “Erasing Universal Home Remote Buttons” later
in this section.
If there is one triangular Light Emitting Diode (LED)
indicator light above the Universal Home Remote
buttons, follow the instructions below.
When programming a garage door, park outside of the
garage. Park directly in line with and facing the garage
door opener motor-head or gate motor-head. Be sure that
people and objects are clear of the garage door or gate
you are programming.
This system provides a way to replace up to three
remote control transmitters used to activate devices
such as garage door openers, security systems,
and home automation devices.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed in
your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the stop and
reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener
model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
2-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Do not hold down the buttons for longer than
30 seconds and do not repeat this step to program
the remaining two Universal Home Remote buttons.
Programming the Universal Home
Remote System
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
2. Hold the end of your hand-held transmitter about
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Universal
Home Remote buttons while keeping the indicator
light in view. The hand-held transmitter was supplied
by the manufacturer of your garage door opener
receiver (motor head unit).
Programming a garage door opener involves
time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure
before you begin. If you do not follow these actions,
the device will time out and you will have to repeat the
procedure.
3. At the same time, press and hold both the Universal
Home Remote button that you would like to use
to control the garage door and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the Universal
Home Remote button or the hand-held transmitter
button until Step 4 has been completed.
To program up to three devices:
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light on the Universal Home Remote
will flash slowly at first and then rapidly after
Universal Home Remote successfully receives the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons.
1. From inside the vehicle, press and hold down the
two outside buttons at the same time, releasing only
when the Universal Home Remote indicator light
begins to flash, after 20 seconds. This step will erase
the factory settings or all previously programmed
buttons.
2-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on continuously,
the programming is complete and your garage door
should move when the Universal Home Remote
button is pressed and released. You do not need to
continue the programming Steps 6 through 8 and
can stop here.
If the Universal Home Remote indicator light
blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to
a constant light, continue with the programming
Steps 6 through 8.
It may be helpful to have another person available
to assist with the remaining steps.
6. After Steps 1 through 5 have been completed,
locate inside the garage the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
2-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. After you press this button, you will have
30 seconds to complete Step 8.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
If you have questions or need help programming the
Universal Home Remote System, call 1-800-355-3515
or go to www.homelink.com.
8. Immediately return to the vehicle. Firmly press and
hold the Universal Home Remote button, chosen in
Step 3 to control the garage door, for two seconds,
and then release it. If the garage door does not
move, press and hold the same button a second time
for two seconds, and then release it. Again, if the
door does not move, press and hold the same button
a third time for two seconds, and then release.
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
the garage door.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with
the following:
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming the Universal
Home Remote System.” Do not repeat Step 1, as this will
erase all previous programming from the Universal Home
Remote buttons.
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
2-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
To reprogram any of the three Universal Home Remote
buttons, repeat the programming instructions earlier
in this section, beginning with Step 2.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
Erase the programmed buttons when you sell or
terminate your lease.
For help or information on the Universal Home Remote
System, call the customer assistance phone number
To erase all programmed buttons on the Universal
Home Remote device:
Storage Areas
Glove Box
To open the glove box, lift up on the lever. The glove
box divider can be removed. The slots on the left
side are for storing the divider.
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
2-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cupholders
Sunglasses Storage Compartment
There are cupholders located in front of and behind the
center console.
Your vehicle may have a sunglasses storage
compartment located near the rearview mirror.
Push the cover to open.
Center Console Storage
To access the cupholders behind the center console,
push the button.
Your vehicle has a center console with an upper, lower
and rear storage area. To access the upper storage
area, lift up on the top lever. To access the lower
storage area, lift up on the bottom lever. The top of the
center console can extend forward. To adjust, hold
the top of the lever up and pull the top of the center
console forward.
Instrument Panel Storage
Your vehicle has a storage area located to left of the
steering wheel. Pull down on the handle to access.
2-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Seat Armrest
Cargo Cover
To access the rear seat armrest, pull the handle down.
Lift the top of the armrest to access the storage area.
Your vehicle may have a cargo cover. It can be used to
cover items in the rear of the vehicle. Pull the cover
toward the rear of the vehicle and place each end in the
slots provided. To install the cover, place each end of
the cover in the holes behind the rear seat. To remove
the cover, pull both ends toward each other.
Convenience Net
Your vehicle may have a convenience net in the rear of
the vehicle. Store small loads as far forward as possible.
The net should not be used to store heavy loads.
Cargo Tie Downs
There are four cargo tie-downs located in the rear
compartment of the vehicle, that can be used to
secure small loads.
2-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cargo Management System
Sunroof
Your vehicle may have a cargo management system
in the rear of the vehicle. The system has rails with
adapters and hooks. These are used to hold the net
and mesh pocket.
The sunroof control
switch is located
between the
sun visors.
To operate the sunroof, the ignition must be in
ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY, or in Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). See Retained Accessory
Pull and release the switch quickly to express-open the
sunroof. Press and release the switch quickly to stop
the sunroof before it is completely open. The sun shade
automatically opens with the sunroof. The sunshade
cannot be closed with the sunroof open.
To close the sunroof, press the switch. The sunshade
must be closed manually.
Pull up on the switch to tilt the sunroof. Push down
on the switch to close it. The sunshade must be
manually opened and closed when the sunroof is
in the vent position.
The adapters are used to hold the net. Slide the
adapters to the desired location on the upper and lower
groove of the rail and turn the handle up to lock it in
place. Compress the rods of the net and insert them into
the corresponding openings of the adapter. The longer
rod is for the upper adapter.
The hooks hold the mesh pocket. To insert a hook on
the rail, place the hook in the upper groove of the
rail and press it into the lower groove.
2-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 3
Instrument Panel
3-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The main components of the instrument panel are the following:
Control System (TCS) on page 4-7
page 3-8.
on page 2-23.
on page 3-14.
U. Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Display.
page 3-11.
3-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hazard Warning Flashers
Tilt Wheel
The hazard warning flashers let you warn the police and
others that you have a problem. The front and rear
turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
The vehicle has a tilt steering wheel which can be
adjusted before driving.
The hazard warning
flasher button is on the
instrument panel.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press again to turn the flashers
completely off.
The hazard warning flashers work even if the key is not
in the ignition switch.
Horn
The tilt lever is on the lower left side of the steering
column.
Press near or on the horn symbols on the steering
wheel pad to sound the horn.
To tilt the wheel, hold the wheel and push the lever
down. Then, move the wheel to a comfortable position
and pull the lever up firmly to lock the steering column
in place.
3-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
The turn signal has one upward (for right) and one
downward (for left) positions, which allow you to signal
a turn or a lane change.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or down.
When the turn is finished, the lever returns automatically
to the original position.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster flashes in the
direction of the turn or
lane change.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes:
To signal a lane change, slightly raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash and release the lever.
The turn signal flashes automatically three times.
• 3 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows
flash rapidly, a signal bulb may be burned out and other
drivers will not see your turn signal.
page 3-8.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows do not go on at all when you
signal a turn, check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit
3-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
Windshield Wipers
To change the headlamps from low beam to high or
high beam to low, push the turn signal lever all the way
towards the instrument panel and release it.
Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using
them. If the wiper blades are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. If the blades do become
damaged, install new blades or blade inserts. See
This indicator light turns on
in the instrument panel
cluster when the high
beams are on.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
To flash the high beams from low beam, pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever all the way towards you.
Then release it.
The lever on the right side of the steering column
operates the windshield wipers. Push up or pull down
on the lever to place it in one of the following positions.
3-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
8(Mist): Pull the lever down and release it for a
single wiping cycle. The lever will return to its original
position. For more cycles, hold the lever down before
releasing it.
Rainsense™ II Wipers
If your vehicle has Rainsense™ II windshield wipers,
the moisture sensor is located next to the inside rearview
mirror and is mounted on the windshield. When active,
these sensors are able to detect moisture on the
windshield and automatically turn on the wipers.
9(Off): Move the lever to this position to turn off the
wipers.
To turn on the Rainsense™ feature, the wipers must be
set to one of the five delay settings on the multifunction
lever. Each of the five settings adjusts the sensitivity
of the rainsensor.
&(Intermittent): Move the lever to this position to
set a delay between wipes. To set for a shorter or longer
delay between wipes, move the switch on top of the lever
left or right to decrease or increase wiper movement.
Since different drivers have different setting preferences,
it is recommended that the mid-range setting (position 3)
be used initially. For more wipes, select the higher
settings; for fewer wipes, select the lower settings located
closer to the off position on the multifunction lever.
a (Low): Move the lever to this position for slow,
steady wiping cycles.
1 (High): Move the lever to this position for rapid
wiping cycles.
The rainsensor will automatically control the frequency of
the wipes from the off setting to the high speed setting
according to the weather conditions. The wipers can be
left in a rainsense mode even when it is not raining.
When Rainsense™ is active, the headlamps will turn
on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in
the AUTO position and the wipers are active.
Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with
the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers
off when going through an automatic car wash.
3-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Heated Windshield Washer
Windshield Washer
If your vehicle has the Rainsense™ windshield wiper
system, the windshield washer fluid is heated. For more
information about Rainsense™ wipers, see Rainsense™
only works with the front wiper system, not the rear
wiper system. This feature helps to clear ice, snow,
tree sap, or bugs from the windshield.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
The heated windshield washer fluid system
automatically turns on when the windshield washer
fluid is used while the rear window defogger is on.
For more information about the rear window defogger,
This activation begins four heated wash/wipe cycles.
The first heated wash/wipe cycle can take up to
40 seconds to occur, depending on outside temperature.
After the first wash/wipe cycle, it can take up to
20 seconds for each of the remaining cycles.
Pull the windshield wiper lever toward you to spray
washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers will run for
a few cycles to clear the windshield. For more wash
cycles, pull the lever forward and hold.
When the heated windshield washer fluid system is
activated under certain outside temperature conditions,
steam might flow out of the washer nozzles for a
short period of time before washer fluid is sprayed.
This is a normal condition.
3-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Cruise Control
The rear wiper and rear wash button is located on the
instrument panel above the climate control system.
With cruise control, the vehicle can maintain a speed
of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your
foot on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
25 mph (40 km/h).
= (Rear Wiper/Washer): Press this button to wash
and wipe the rear window.
The rear window washer uses the same reservoir as
the windshield washer. Check the windshield washer
reservoir level if the front windshield can be worked, but
no fluid is sprayed when the rear washer is activated.
{CAUTION:
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
5 (Delay): Press this button to turn the delayed wiping
on or off.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and
you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting Cruise Control
E (On/Off): Press this button to turn the cruise control
system on and off. An indicator light comes on.
RES+ (Resume/Accel): Press the thumbwheel up to
resume a set speed or to accelerate to a higher speed.
{CAUTION:
−SET (Set/Coast): Press the thumbwheel down to
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
set a speed or to decrease the speed.
To set a speed do the following:
1. Press the on/off symbol to turn cruise control on.
The indicator light on the button comes on.
2. Get to the speed desired.
3. Press the thumbwheel toward −SET and release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control buttons
are located on the left side
of the steering wheel.
When the brakes are applied, the cruise control
shuts off.
Resuming a Set Speed
If the cruise control is set at a desired speed and then
the brakes are applied, the cruise control is disengaged.
The indicator light on the instrument panel cluster goes
out when the cruise is no longer engaged. To return to
the previously set speed, press the thumbwheel up
toward RES+ briefly when the vehicle has reached a
speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more.
This accelerates your vehicle to the previously selected
speed.
3-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Increasing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed.
Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle’s
speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the
vehicle will slow down to the previously set cruise
control speed.
• Disengage the cruise control, but do not turn it off.
• If the cruise control system is already engaged,
press the thumbwheel up toward RES+ and hold it
until your vehicle accelerates to the desired speed,
and then release the switch. To increase the speed
in very small amounts, press the thumbwheel up
toward RES+ briefly and then release it. Each
time this is done, the vehicle will go about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) faster.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well the cruise control works on hills depends upon
the vehicle’s speed, load, and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you might have to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain the vehicle’s speed. When
going downhill, you might have to brake or shift to a lower
gear to maintain the vehicle’s speed. Of course, applying
the brakes ends cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and do not use cruise control on
steep hills.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
If the cruise control system is already engaged,
• Push the thumbwheel toward −SET and hold
until the desired lower speed is reached, then
release it.
Ending Cruise Control
There are three ways to disengage the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal or clutch; when
cruise control disengages, the indicator light on
the instrument panel cluster goes out.
• To slow down in very small amounts, push the
thumbwheel toward −SET briefly. Each time
this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) slower.
• Press the on/off button, this will turn off the cruise
control system.
3-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Erasing Speed Memory
The cruise control set speed memory is erased when
the cruise control or the ignition is turned off.
;(Parking Lamps): This position turns on the
parking lamps together with the following:
• Sidemarker Lamps
• Taillamps
Exterior Lamps
• License Plate Lamps
• Instrument Panel Lights
The exterior lamp control is
located on the instrument
panel to the left of the
steering wheel.
2 (Headlamps): This position turns on the
headlamps, together with the previously listed lamps
and lights.
Lamps On Reminder
A warning chime sounds, if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition is off and the lamps are on.
Wiper Activated Headlamps
This feature automatically turns on the headlamps and
parking lamps if the exterior lamp control is set in the
AUTO position and the windshield wipers are turned on
and have completed eight wipe cycles. See Exterior
The exterior lamp control can be turned to the following
positions:
9 (Off): This position turns off the exterior lamps.
The knob returns to the AUTO position after it is
released.
When the ignition is turned off, the wiper-activated
headlamps immediately turn off. They also turn off if
the windshield wiper control is turned off.
AUTO (Automatic): This position is the automatic
mode for headlamps. The exterior lamps turn on and
off, depending on outside lighting.
3-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Automatic Headlamp System
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions,
but they can be especially helpful in the short periods
after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional daytime
running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in
Canada.
When it is dark enough outside, the headlamps come
on automatically.
The DRL system makes the low-beam headlamps come
on in daylight when the following conditions are met:
• The engine is running,
• The exterior lamp band is in AUTO, and
• The light sensor determines it is daytime.
When the DRL are on, the low-beam headlamps will be
on. The taillamps, sidemarker, and other lamps will
not be on. The instrument panel will not be lit up either.
There is a light sensor located on top of the instrument
panel. Make sure it is not covered, or the headlamps
will come on when they are not needed.
When the exterior lamp band is turned to the headlamp
position, the regular headlamps will come on. The other
lamps that come on with the headlamps will also
come on.
The system may also turn on the headlamps when
driving through a parking garage or tunnel.
When the headlamps are turned off, the regular lamps
also turn off, and the low-beam headlamps turn on.
The regular headlamp system should be used when
needed.
3-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Dome Lamp
This feature controls the brightness of the instrument
panel lights.
* (Dome Lamp Override): Press this button to keep
the dome lamps and other interior lamps turned off while
any door is open. Press this button again to return it to the
out position and the lamps automatically come on when
any door is opened.
The thumbwheel for this
feature is located on the
left side of the steering
wheel next to the exterior
lamps control.
+ (On/Off): Press this button to turn the dome
lamps on and off while the doors are closed.
Entry Lighting
If the dome lamp override button is in the out position,
the lamps inside the vehicle automatically come on
when any door is opened or when the Remote Keyless
Entry (RKE) unlock button is pressed. After the door is
opened the lights remain on and stay on for 20 seconds
after the doors are closed, or until the key is put into the
ignition and turned to the ACC/ACCESSORY position.
The lights will then gradually dim until it is no longer lit.
Turn the thumbwheel to the right to brighten the lights
or to the left to dim them.
3-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To use the outlets, remove the cover. When not in use,
always cover the outlet with the protective cap.
Reading Lamps
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on for
extended periods will drain the battery. Always
turn off electrical equipment when not in use and
do not plug in equipment that exceeds the maximum
20 ampere rating.
To turn the reading lamps on or off, press the button
located next to each lamp.
Battery Run-Down Protection
The battery saver feature is designed to protect your
vehicle’s battery.
Certain electrical accessories may not be compatible
with the accessory power outlet and could result in blown
vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a problem,
see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the
accessory power outlet.
If any interior or exterior lamp is left on and the ignition
is turned off, the battery rundown protection system
automatically turns the lamp off after 10 minutes.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Check with your
dealer/retailer before adding electrical equipment.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
The accessory power outlets can be used to connect
electrical equipment such as a cellular phone or
CB radio.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the
installation instructions included with the equipment.
The accessory power outlets are located on the rear
of the center storage console and in the rear cargo
compartment. There may be a power outlet located inside
the instrument panel storage area below the climate
controls.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
3-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Avoid using these settings that may lead to fewer auto
stops and to higher fuel consumption:
Climate Controls
• Manual fan speed operation.
Automatic Climate Control System
The heating, cooling, and ventilation for the vehicle can
be controlled with this system.
• Defrost mode. Only use this setting to clear the
windows.
• Extreme cold or hot air temperature settings, such
as 60°F (16°C) or 90°F (32°C).
• Normal air conditioning mode, if A/C is required.
Automatic Operation
This climate control system automatically maintains the
desired temperature inside the vehicle.
Do not cover the sensor located on the top of the
instrument panel near the windshield or the sensor grille
below the climate control faceplate. These two sensors
help regulate the inside air temperature.
Climate Control Influence on Hybrid
Operation and Fuel Economy
To maximize your fuel economy, use the following
settings:
AUTO (Automatic Fan): Turn the fan knob to AUTO
for the system to automatically adjust the fan speed
to reach the desired inside temperature.
Temperature Control: Select the desired air
temperature between 60-90°F (16-32°C). Typically,
the best setting is near 75°F (23°C). Choosing the
coldest or warmest temperature setting does not
cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
• Set the fan knob to AUTO.
• Set the air delivery knob to AUTO.
• Select an air temperature setting near 75°F (23°C).
• Select the Hybrid A/C button, if A/C is required.
3-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AUTO (Automatic Air Delivery Mode): Turn the
air delivery mode knob to AUTO for the system to
automatically control the direction of the airflow to help
reach the desired inside temperature.
Manual Operation
It is best to use the automatic settings to maximize fuel
economy.
To change the current fan speed, turn the left knob.
The system automatically controls the air inlet to supply
the outside air or recirculated inside air needed to cool
the vehicle faster. The indicator light on the recirculation
button will be lit whenever the system changes to
recirculation. Press the recirculation button to change
to outside air. However, the recirculation mode may
turn back on automatically.
A(Fan): Turn the left knob clockwise to increase
the fan speed or counterclockwise to decrease the
fan speed. To turn the fan off, turn the left knob to
the 9 position. In any setting other than off, the fan
runs continuously with the ignition on. The fan must be
turned on to run the air conditioning compressor. There
will be some airflow noticeable from the various outlets
when driving, even with the fan in the off position.
This is to ensure some fresh air is always available
in the vehicle. To turn off the air completely, turn the
In cold weather, if the fan and air delivery modes are
in automatic, the system starts at lower fan speeds to
avoid directing cold air into the vehicle until warmer air is
available. The climate control system directs air to the
floor, but may automatically change modes as the vehicle
warms up to maintain the chosen temperature setting.
The length of time needed to warm the interior depends
on the outside temperature and inside temperature of
the vehicle.
fan to 9 and select the recirculation button.
Temperature Control: Select the desired cabin air
temperature between 60-90°F (16-32°C). Typically,
the best setting is near 75°F (23°C). Choosing the
coldest or warmest temperature setting does not
cause the system to heat or cool any faster.
3-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change the current air delivery mode, use the right
knob to select one of the following:
When Normal A/C is selected, the climate control system
will prevent all automatic engine start/stop operations.
This will ensure the cabin comfort is maintained. See “Air
Conditioning and Automatic Engine Start/Stop” later in
this section.
H(Vent): This mode directs air to the instrument
panel outlets.
)(Bi-Level): This mode divides the air between the
N (Hybrid Air Conditioning): Press this button to
turn the Hybrid A/C system on or off. When this button is
pressed, an indicator light comes on to show that the
Hybrid A/C is activated. Hybrid A/C can be selected in
any mode, except defrost as long as the fan is on and the
outside air temperature is above freezing. Hybrid A/C
cannot be selected at the same time as the normal air
conditioning. A flashing indicator light indicates the air
conditioning compressor is not available.
instrument panel outlets and the floor outlets.
6(Floor): This mode directs most of the air to the
floor outlets with some air directed to the windshield.
When this mode is selected, the system turns the
recirculation mode off. Recirculation mode cannot be
selected while in floor mode. This is to help prevent
window fogging.
The Hybrid A/C works to balance fuel economy and air
conditioning comfort. When Hybrid A/C is used in warm
weather, the vehicle gets better fuel economy by allowing
more frequent start/stops. For additional cooling, select
Normal A/C. See “Air Conditioning and Automatic Engine
Start/Stop” later in this section.
The right knob can also be used to select defog or
defrost mode. See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
#(Normal Air Conditioning): Press this button to
turn the air conditioning system on or off. When this
button is pressed, an indicator light comes on to show
that the air conditioning is activated. Normal Air
Conditioning (A/C) can be selected in any mode as long
as the fan is on and the outside air temperature is above
freezing. Normal A/C cannot be selected at the same
time as Hybrid Air Conditioning (A/C). A flashing indicator
light indicates that the air conditioning compressor is
currently not available.
3-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manually turn the right knob to select the defog or
defrost mode.
@(Recirculation): Press this button to toggle
between recirculate and outside air modes. The indicator
light turns on when the recirculate mode is selected.
This mode can be used to prevent outside air and odors
from entering the vehicle or to help cool the air inside
the vehicle more quickly. Avoid using the recirculation
mode during high periods of humidity and cool outside
temperatures since this may result in increased window
fogging. If window fogging is experienced, select the
defrost mode.
-(Defog): This mode directs air to the windshield,
side window outlets and floor outlets. When this mode is
selected, the system turns the recirculation mode off and
runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside
air is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode cannot
be selected while in defog mode. This helps prevent
window fogging and moisture building up inside the
vehicle.
Recirculation mode is not available in floor, defog or
defrost modes. If the button is selected in these modes,
the indicator will flash. This helps prevent window fogging
and moisture building up inside the vehicle.
0(Defrost): This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield, with some air directed to the side window
outlets and the floor outlets. When this mode is selected,
the system turns the recirculation mode off automatically
and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the
outside air is at or below freezing. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in defrost mode. This helps
prevent window fogging and moisture building up inside
the vehicle. In this mode, the climate control system
prevents all automatic engine start/stop operations.
This ensures the best defrost performance.
Defogging and Defrosting
Fog on the inside of windows is a result of high humidity
(moisture) condensing on the cool window glass. This
can be minimized if the climate control system is used
properly. There are two modes to clear fog or frost from
the windshield and side windows. Use the defog mode
to clear the windows of fog or moisture and warm the
passengers. Use the defrost mode to remove fog or frost
from the windshield more quickly. For best results, clear
all snow and ice from the windshield before defrosting.
3-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rear Window Defogger
Air Conditioning and Engine Start/Stop
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
On hot days, use the automatic fan and automatic air
delivery mode settings and the vehicle will reach the
desired temperature more quickly. The desired fan and
air delivery mode settings can still be adjusted manually.
Open the windows to let the hot inside air escape, then
close them. This helps reduce the time it takes for the
vehicle to cool down and helps the system to operate
more efficiently.
The rear window defogger will only work when the
ignition is in ON/RUN.
<(Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to
turn the rear window defogger on or off. An indicator
light on the button comes on to show that the rear
window defogger is activated.
When either the Normal A/C or Hybrid A/C modes are
active, the air conditioning system removes moisture
from the air, so a small amount of water may drip under
the vehicle while idling or after turning off the engine.
This is normal.
The rear window defogger stays on for about 10 minutes
if the vehicle remains at slower vehicle speeds or until
the button is pressed, or unless the ignition is turned
to ACC/ACCESSORY or LOCK/OFF. If turned on again,
the defogger only runs for about five minutes before
turning off again. At higher vehicle speeds, the defogger
may stay on continuously. The defogger can always
be turned off by pressing the button again or by turning
off the ignition.
The use of Normal A/C causes the engine to keep
running while the vehicle is at a complete stop to allow
the climate control system to continue cooling.
The use of Hybrid A/C allows automatic engine start/
stop operations while the vehicle is at a complete stop.
The air conditioning compressor can not run when
the engine is not running, resulting in reduced cooling
performance. The climate control system may keep the
engine running or restart the engine during a stop to
continue cooling. Selecting the Normal A/C button forces
the engine and air conditioning compressor to restart
automatically. For more information about Engine
Start/Stop operation, see Starting the Engine
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside
of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would
not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not
attach a temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal
or anything similar to the defogger grid.
3-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The passenger compartment air filter can be accessed
by removing the entire glove box.
Outlet Adjustment
Use the louvers located on the air outlets to change the
direction of the airflow.
1. Remove the six screws from around the glove box
and detach the three inner clips from the glove box.
Operation Tips
• Clear away any ice, snow, or leaves from the air
inlets at the base of the vehicle that may block
the flow of air into your vehicle.
• Do not use any non-GM approved hood deflectors
that could adversely affect the performance of the
system.
• Keep the path under the front seats clear of objects
to help circulate the air inside of your vehicle more
effectively.
Passenger Compartment Air Filter
The filter removes dust, pollen, and other airborne
irritants from outside air which is drawn into the vehicle.
2. Lower the loosened glove box housing.
The filter should be replaced as part of routine
scheduled maintenance. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for replacement intervals. To find out what
type of filter to use, see Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-13.
3-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Unplug both wire cables and remove the glove box.
4. Remove the air filter cover screw.
3-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This section describes the warning lights and gages on
the vehicle.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention
to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is
a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some
warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started
to indicate they are working.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and
warning lights work together to indicate a problem with
the vehicle.
5. Remove the filter cover and pull out the old air filter.
6. Install the new air filter.
7. Reinstall the air filter cover. Reconnect the wire
cabling and re-install the glove box.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
while driving, or when one of the gages shows there may
be a problem, check the section that explains what to do.
Follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to do repairs can be
costly and even dangerous.
See your dealer/retailer if additional assistance is
needed.
3-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Instrument Panel Cluster
The instrument panel cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will know how
fast you are going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you will need to know to drive safely
and economically.
United States cluster, Canada similar
3-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
The speedometer lets you see your speed in both miles
per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
The tachometer
displays the engine
speed in revolutions
per minute (rpm).
The odometer shows how far your vehicle has been
driven, in either miles or kilometers.
Your vehicle has a tamper-resistant odometer. If your
vehicle needs a new odometer installed, the new one will
be set to the mileage total of the old odometer. If this is
not possible, it will be set at zero and a label must be
put on the driver’s door to show the old mileage reading
when the new odometer was installed. If the mileage
is unknown, the label should then indicate “previous
mileage unknown”.
U.S. shown,
Canada similar
Trip Odometer
The auto stop indicator is located at the bottom of the
tachometer. For more information see Auto Stop Mode
on page 3-42.
Your trip odometer is located on the instrument panel
and shows how far your vehicle has been driven since the
trip odometer was last reset. To reset the trip odometer
to zero, press and hold the trip/reset button on the
speedometer for about two seconds. Press the trip/reset
button to switch between the trip odometer and odometer.
3-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light
Safety Belt Reminders
Several seconds after the engine is started, a chime will
sound for several seconds to remind the front passenger
to buckle their safety belt. This would only occur if the
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
passenger safety belt light, located on the instrument
panel, will come on and stay on for several seconds
and then flash for several more.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the engine is started, a chime will come on for
several seconds to remind people to fasten their safety
belts, unless the driver’s safety belt is already buckled.
The safety belt light will
also come on and stay
on for several seconds,
then it will flash for
several more.
This chime and light are
repeated if the passenger
remains unbuckled and
the vehicle is in motion.
This chime and light is repeated if the driver remains
unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the driver’s belt
is already buckled, neither the chime nor the light will
come on.
If the passenger’s safety belt is buckled, neither the
chime nor the light will come on.
3-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Airbag Readiness Light
{CAUTION:
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol.
The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor,
the pretensioners, the airbag modules, the wiring and
the crash sensing and diagnostic module. For more
information on the airbag system, see Airbag System
on page 1-53.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you
start your vehicle, it means the airbag system
may not be working properly. The airbags in
your vehicle may not inflate in a crash, or they
could even inflate without a crash. To help
avoid injury to yourself or others, have your
vehicle serviced right away.
This light will come
on when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. The light
should go out and the
system is ready.
The airbag readiness light should flash for a
few seconds when you start the engine. If the light
does not come on then, have it fixed immediately.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag
Driver Information Center (DIC) message may also come
more information.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
Your vehicle has the passenger sensing system.
Your instrument panel has a passenger airbag status
indicator.
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
United States
Canada
When you start the vehicle, the passenger airbag status
indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on
and off, for several seconds as a system check. Then,
after several more seconds, the status indicator will
light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to
let you know the status of the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
3-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may
be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer/retailer for service.
{CAUTION:
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag if the system detects a rear-facing
child restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no
one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on, it
means that something may be wrong with the
airbag system. If this ever happens, have the
vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the airbag(s). See Airbag Readiness Light
on page 3-29 for more on this, including
important safety information.
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
for more on this, including important safety information.
3-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Charging System Light
Brake System Warning Light
This light will come on
briefly when you turn on the
ignition key, but the engine
is not running, as a check
to show you it is working.
United States
Canada
It should go out once the engine is running. If it stays
on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem
with the charging system. A charging system Driver
Information Center (DIC) message may also appear.
more information. This light could indicate that there are
problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an
electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If you
must drive a short distance with the light on, be certain
to turn off all the accessories, such as the radio and air
conditioner.
This light should come on briefly when the engine is
started.
If it does not come on, have it fixed so it will be ready to
warn you if there is a problem.
When the ignition is on, the brake system warning
light will come on when the parking brake is set.
The light will stay on if the parking brake does not
release fully. If it stays on after the parking brake is
fully released, there is a brake problem. Have your
brake system inspected immediately.
3-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the light comes on while driving, a chime will sound.
Pull off the road and stop. The pedal might be harder to
push or go closer to the floor. It might also take longer
to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Warning Light
For vehicles with
the Antilock Brake
System (ABS), this light
comes on briefly when
the engine is started.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed
for service.
That is normal. If the light does not come on then, have
it fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off, if the light
comes on when you are driving, stop as soon as it is
safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the
engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light still
stays on, or comes on again while you are driving,
your vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system
warning light is not on, your vehicle still has brakes, but
not antilock brakes. If the regular brake system warning
light is also on, your vehicle does not have antilock
brakes and there is a problem with the regular brakes.
For vehicles with a Driver Information Center (DIC),
all brake related DIC messages.
3-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Warning Light
Electronic Stability Program
Indicator Light
The Traction Control
System (TCS) warning
light may come on for
the following reasons:
This comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
• The system is turned off by pressing the traction
control button located above the audio system on
the instrument panel. The warning light will come
on and stay on. Press the button again, to turn the
system back on. The warning light should go off.
more information.
It flashes while the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) or
the Traction Control System (TCS) is working. This light
will come on when the ESP has been turned off and if
there is a problem with the ESP or the TCS. See Traction
• An engine and brake system problem related to
traction control makes the TCS turn off.
If the TCS warning light comes on and stays on for an
extended period of time when the system is turned
on, your vehicle needs service.
3-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This light comes on briefly when starting the vehicle
as a system check. If it does not, take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer for service.
Tire Pressure Light
The tire pressure light
comes on briefly when the
engine is started.
If this light comes on and
stays lit, the engine has
overheated.
It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System.
When the Light is Solid
This indicates that one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated.
If this happens pull over and see Engine Overheating
on page 5-23 for more information.
Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do,
and inflate them to the proper pressure. See Tires
on page 5-47 for more information.
Notice: Driving with the engine coolant temperature
warning light on could cause your vehicle to
Your vehicle could be damaged, and it might not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive with
the engine coolant temperature warning light on.
When the Light Flashes First and
Then is Solid
This indicates that there may be a problem with the Tire
Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about
a minute and then stays solid for the remainder of
the ignition cycle. This sequence will repeat with every
page 5-54 for more information.
3-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and can cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This could
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
A computer system called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) monitors operation
of the fuel, ignition, and emission control systems.
It makes sure that emissions are at acceptable levels
for the life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment.
The check engine light
comes on to indicate that
there is an OBD II problem
and service is required.
This light comes on, as a check to show it is working,
when the ignition is turned ON/RUN but the engine is not
running. If the light does not come on, have it repaired.
This light also comes on during a malfunction in
one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and could damage the emission control system
on your vehicle. Diagnosis and service might
be required.
Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before
any problem is apparent. This can prevent more serious
damage to your vehicle. This system is also designed
to assist your service technician in correctly diagnosing
any malfunction.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service might be required.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after a while, the emission controls might
not work as well, your vehicle’s fuel economy might
not be as good, and the engine might not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that might
not be covered by your warranty.
3-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or
missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the
atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly
installed should turn the light off.
If the Light is Flashing
The following can prevent more serious damage to your
vehicle:
• Reduce vehicle speed.
• Avoid hard accelerations.
• Avoid steep uphill grades.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your vehicle’s electrical system might be wet.
The condition is usually corrected when the electrical
system dries out. A few driving trips should turn the
light off.
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel. See
the engine not to run as efficiently as designed. You
might notice this as stalling after start-up, stalling when
you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation on
acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration — these
conditions might go away once the engine is warmed up.
This will be detected by the system and cause the light to
turn on.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle.
Turn the ignition off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer
for service as soon as possible.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If the Light Is On Steady
You might be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer/retailer can check the vehicle. Your dealer/
retailer has the proper test equipment and diagnostic
tools to fix any mechanical or electrical problems that
might have developed.
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap
3-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Emissions Inspection and Maintenance
Programs
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
might begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Oil Pressure Light
This light stays on after the
engine is started, or comes
on while driving, if there
is a low engine oil problem.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
This light indicates that the engine is not receiving
enough oil. The engine could be low on oil, or could
have some other oil problem. Have it fixed immediately.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen if
you have recently replaced the battery or if the battery
has run down. The diagnostic system is designed to
evaluate critical emission control systems during normal
driving. This can take several days of routine driving.
If you have done this and your vehicle still does not pass
the inspection for lack of OBD system readiness, your
dealer/retailer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.
The oil pressure light also comes on when the ignition
is on but the engine is not running, as a test to show it
is working. It will go out when the ignition is turned
to START. If the light does not come on briefly while
the ignition is on, the fuse or bulb might need to
be replaced. See your dealer/retailer for service.
3-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Change Engine Oil Light
{CAUTION:
This light means that
service is required for
your vehicle.
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance
may damage the engine. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Always follow
the maintenance schedule in this manual for
changing engine oil.
After the engine oil is changed the engine oil life system
needs to be reset in order to turn off this light. See Engine
3-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Security Light
Highbeam On Light
For information regarding
this light and the vehicle’s
security system, see
on page 2-13.
This light comes on when
the high-beam headlamps
are in use.
for more information.
Cruise Control Light
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light
This light comes on
whenever the cruise
control is set.
This light comes on briefly
when the engine is started.
The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off.
It also comes on when the windshield washer fluid is
for more information.
3-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Four things that can happen but do not mean the fuel
gage is not functioning properly are:
Fuel Gage
• At the service station, the fuel pump shuts off
before the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicates.
• The gage moves a little when the vehicle turns a
corner or accelerates.
• The gage takes a few seconds to stabilize after the
ignition is turned on, and goes back to empty after
the ignition is turned off.
United States
Canada
For the fuel tank capacity, see Capacities and
When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows about how
much fuel is in the fuel tank.
When the indicator nears empty, the low fuel light
will comes on. There still is a little fuel left, but you
should get more soon. See Low Fuel Warning Light
on page 3-42 for more information.
3-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Auto Stop Mode
The light next to the fuel
gage comes on briefly
when you are starting
the engine.
United States
Canada
It also comes on when the vehicle is low on fuel.
After fuel is added, the light should go off. If it does not
come on as you start the engine take the vehicle to
your dealer/retailer for service.
This mark on the tachometer signifies that the engine is
in Auto Stop mode which is a fuel saving operation.
When the vehicle is off, the tachometer needle moves
to OFF. If the driver’s door is opened while in Auto Stop,
a chime will sound.
3-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the hybrid battery or other hybrid components are
very hot or cold, the CHARGE and ASSIST functions
may be suspended until the component temperatures
are normal.
Charge/Assist Gage
The CHARGE/ASSIST
gage displays the charge
(current) into and out
of the hybrid battery.
Fuel Economy Light
This light comes on when
the vehicle is achieving fuel
economy close to its rated
performance.
While the electric motor is performing an automatic
restart of the engine, or while it is assisting the engine,
as in maximum acceleration, the needle moves to the
ASSIST range, located on the right side of the gage.
The needle moves to the CHARGE range when the
electric motor operates as a generator to perform
regenerative braking, as the vehicle slows down.
information. The needle also moves into the CHARGE
range if the hybrid control system identifies it is an
efficient time to charge the hybrid battery.
Driving habits that improve fuel economy increases the
time that the fuel economy light is on.
To turn the fuel economy light off or on, press the
trip/reset button until the HOLD STEM TO SET ECO
(Economy) DIC message is displayed. Then press and
hold the trip/reset button until off or on is selected.
3-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Operation and Displays
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The DIC has different displays which can be accessed
by pressing the reset stem located on the instrument
panel cluster. These displays are explained in the
following section. To scroll through the available
functions, press and release the reset stem.
Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC).
All information appears in the DIC display located in the
instrument panel cluster.
The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short
delay, the DIC displays the information that was last
displayed before the engine was turned off.
ODOMETER
Press and release the reset stem until ODOMETER
displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle
has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km).
The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system
information, and warning messages if a system problem
is detected.
The DIC also displays the compass direction, outside air
temperature, and shift position indicator at the top of the
DIC display. If there is a problem with the system that
controls the temperature display, the numbers will be
replaced with dashes. If this occurs, have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer. If an abnormal
TRIP
Press and release the reset stem until TRIP displays.
This display shows the current distance traveled in either
miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for
the trip odometer.
temperature reading is displayed for an extended period
of time, consult your dealer/retailer. Under certain
circumstances, especially when the engine is idling,
a delay updating the temperature display is normal.
To reset the trip odometer to zero, press and hold the
reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed.
information.
3-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RANGE
INSTANT (Instantaneous) FUEL ECONOMY
Press and release the reset stem until RANGE is
displayed. The RANGE display will only be available
when the vehicle is not in PARK (P).
Press and release the reset stem INSTANT FUEL
ECONOMY displays. The INSTANT FUEL ECONOMY
display will only be available when the vehicle is not
in PARK (P).
This display shows the approximate number of
remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle
can be driven without refueling.
This display shows the current fuel economy at a
particular moment and will change frequently as driving
conditions change. This display shows the instantaneous
fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per
100 kilometers (L/100 km). This display cannot be reset.
The fuel range estimate is based on an average of
the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driving history
and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank.
This estimate will change if driving conditions change.
For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent
stops, this display may read one number, but if
the vehicle is driven on a freeway, the number may
change even though the same amount of fuel is in the
fuel tank. This is because different driving conditions
produce different fuel economies. Generally, freeway
driving produces better fuel economy than city driving.
AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
Press and release the reset stem AVERAGE FUEL
ECONOMY displays. The AVERAGE FUEL ECONOMY
display will only be available when the vehicle is not
in PARK (P).
This display shows the approximate average miles per
gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km).
This number is calculated based on the number of mpg
(L/100 km) recorded since the last time this display
was reset. To reset this display to zero, press and hold
the reset stem.
If your vehicle is low on fuel, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message displays. See “FUEL LEVEL LOW” under
information.
3-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OIL LIFE
UNITS
Press and release the reset stem until UNITS displays.
This display selects the units of measurement. Once
in this display, press the reset stem to select ENGLISH
(default) or METRIC.
Press and release the reset stem until OIL LIFE
REMAINING displays. The OIL LIFE display will only
be available when the vehicle is in PARK (P). This display
shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If OIL
LIFE REMAINING 99% appears on the display, that
means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil
life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule
consistent with your driving conditions.
HOLD STEM TO SET LANGUAGE
Press and release the reset stem until HOLD STEM TO
SET LANGUAGE displays. The HOLD STEM TO SET
LANGUAGE display will only be available when the
vehicle is in PARK (P). This display selects the language
in which the DIC messages will appear. Once in this
display, press the reset stem to select ENGLISH
(default), SPANISH, or FRENCH.
When the remaining oil life is low, the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL SOON message will appear on the
display. See “CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON” under
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in the
Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Scheduled
Tire Pressure
The pressure for each tire can be viewed in the DIC.
The tire pressure will be shown in either pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascals (kPa). Press and release
the reset stem until the DIC displays FRONT TIRES
LEFT ## PSI (kPa) RIGHT ## PSI (kPa). Press and
release the reset stem again until the DIC displays REAR
TIRES LEFT ## PSI (kPa) RIGHT ## PSI (kPa).
If a low or high tire pressure condition is detected by the
system while driving, a message advising you to check
the pressure in a specific tire will appear in the display.
information.
Remember, reset the OIL LIFE after each oil change.
It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL
LIFE accidentally at any time other than when the oil
has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately
until the next oil change. To reset the engine oil
3-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the tire pressure display shows dashes instead of a
value, there may be a problem with your vehicle. If this
consistently occurs, see your dealer/retailer for service.
HOLD STEM TO SET ECO (Economy)
Press and release the reset stem until HOLD STEM TO
SET ECO (Economy) displays. The HOLD STEM TO
SET ECO display will only be available when the vehicle
is in PARK (P). This display turns the fuel economy light
on or off. Once in this display, press the reset stem to
page 3-43 for more information.
HOLD STEM TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY
This display matches Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitters to your vehicle. To match a transmitter:
1. Put the vehicle in PARK (P).
2. Press and release the reset stem until HOLD STEM
TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays.
HOLD STEM TO CALIBRATE COMPASS
Press and release the reset stem until HOLD STEM TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS displays. The compass can
be manually calibrated. To calibrate the compass
3. Press and hold the reset stem until REMOTE KEY
LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed.
4. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on
the first transmitter at the same time for about
15 seconds.
HOLD STEM TO SET COMPASS ZONE
A chime will sound indicating that the transmitter
is matched and REMOTE KEY LEARNING
COMPLETE will be displayed.
Press and release the reset stem until HOLD STEM
TO SET COMPASS ZONE displays. To change
the compass zone through the DIC, see DIC Compass
on page 3-48.
5. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat
Step 4.
Each vehicle can have a maximum of
eight transmitters matched to it.
6. To exit the programming mode, cycle the key to
LOCK/OFF.
3-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DIC Compass
Your vehicle has a compass in the Driver Information
Center (DIC).
Compass Zone
The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory.
Your dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your
location.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a long
distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or
province, it will be necessary to compensate for compass
variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone
is not set correctly.
Compass variance is the difference between the earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass
is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may
give false readings. The compass must be set to the
variance zone in which the vehicle is traveling.
2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance
zone number on the map.
Zones 1 through 15 are available.
3. Press and hold the reset stem to scroll through and
select the appropriate variance zone.
To set the zone, release the reset stem when the
correct zone is displayed.
4. Press the reset stem until the vehicle heading,
for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC.
To adjust for compass variance, use the following
procedure:
Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure
1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is
moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in PARK (P).
Press the reset stem until HOLD STEM TO SET
COMPASS ZONE: ## displays.
5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass.
See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following.
3-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To calibrate the compass, use the following procedure:
Compass Calibration
The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate
the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location,
such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle
in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate
away from tall buildings, utility wires, manhole covers,
or other industrial structures, if possible.
Compass Calibration Procedure
1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the
compass is set to the variance zone in which
the vehicle is located. See “Compass Variance
(Zone) Procedure” earlier in this section.
Do not operate any switches such as window,
sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during
the calibration procedure.
If CAL should ever appear in the DIC display, the
compass should be calibrated.
If the DIC display does not show a heading, for
example, N for North, or the heading does not change
after making turns, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may be
caused by a magnetic CB or cell phone antenna mount, a
magnetic emergency light, magnetic note pad holder, or
any other magnetic item. Turn off the vehicle, move the
magnetic item, then turn on the vehicle and calibrate the
compass.
2. Press the reset stem until HOLD STEM TO
CALIBRATE COMPASS displays.
3. Press and hold the reset stem to start the compass
calibration.
4. The DIC will display CALIBRATING COMPASS:
TURN IN CIRCLES. Drive the vehicle in tight
circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) to complete
the calibration. The DIC will display COMPASS
CALIBRATION COMPLETE for a few seconds
when the calibration is complete. The DIC display
will then return to HOLD STEM TO CALIBRATE
COMPASS.
3-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE
DIC Warnings and Messages
This message displays when the charging system
detects that the battery is being drained. You may notice
that the vehicle attempts to reduce the drain for you by
turning off accessories, such as interior fans, rear
defogger, and heated seats. Turn off all accessories.
If the vehicle is not running, start and run the engine
for at least 10 minutes to allow the battery to recharge.
If the engine is running and the condition persists,
see your dealer/retailer immediately.
Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver
that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some
action may be needed by the driver to correct the
condition. Multiple messages may appear one after
another.
Some messages may not require immediate action, but
you can press the reset stem on the instrument panel
cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages
and to clear them from the display.
BUCKLE PASSENGER SEATBELT
This message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
page 1-63.
Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display
because they are more urgent. These messages require
action before they can be cleared. Take any messages
that appear on the display seriously and remember that
clearing the messages will only make the messages
disappear, not correct the problem.
This message displays and a chime sounds when
the ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is buckled, the
passenger’s safety belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their safety belt.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag
is enabled. If the passenger’s safety belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
3-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON
This message reminds you to buckle the driver’s
safety belt.
This message displays when service is required for the
for more information.
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
ignition is on, the driver’s safety belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle your
safety belt.
Acknowledging this message will not reset the OIL LIFE
REMAINING display. That must be done at the OIL
LIFE screen. See “OIL LIFE” under DIC Operation and
on page 5-16 for more information.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is
on and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
repeated. If the driver’s safety belt is already buckled,
this message and chime will not come on.
CHANGE TRANSMISSION FLUID
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
CALIBRATING COMPASS: TURN IN
CIRCLES
This message displays when calibrating the compass.
Drive the vehicle in circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h)
page 3-48.
This message displays when the life of the
transmission fluid has expired and it should be
for the proper fluid and change intervals.
3-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
CRUISE CONTROL SET TO XXX
This message displays when the pressure in one or
more of the vehicle’s tires needs to be checked. This
message also displays LEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT,
LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR to indicate which tire
needs to be checked. You can receive more than one tire
pressure message at a time. To read the other messages
that may have been sent at the same time, press the
reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the
DIC, stop as soon as you can. Have the tire pressures
checked and set to those shown on the Tire Loading
page 5-52. The DIC also shows the tire pressure values.
pressure is low, the low tire pressure warning light comes
This message displays whenever the cruise control
information.
DRIVER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when the driver door is not
closed properly. Close the door completely.
ENGINE HOT
A/C (Air Conditioning) OFF
This message displays when the engine coolant
becomes hotter than the normal operating temperature.
To avoid added strain on a hot engine, the air
conditioning compressor is automatically turned off.
When the coolant temperature returns to normal,
the A/C operation automatically resumes. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
COMPASS CALIBRATION COMPLETE
This message displays when the compass calibration is
ENGINE OIL LOW: ADD OIL
Your vehicle may have an engine oil level sensor.
If it does, this message displays when the oill is low.
3-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE
ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
power is reduced. Reduced engine power can affect the
vehicle’s ability to accelerate. If this message is on, but
there is no reduction in performance, proceed to your
destination. The performance may be reduced the next
time the vehicle is driven. The vehicle may be driven at a
reduced speed while this message is on, but acceleration
and speed may be reduced. Anytime this message stays
on, the vehicle should be taken to your dealer/retailer for
service as soon as possible.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
as possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
page 5-23 for more information.
This message displays when the engine coolant
temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to
idle until it cools down.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE
This message displays when your vehicle is low on fuel.
Refill the fuel tank as soon as possible. See Fuel Gage
information.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon
for more information.
HOOD OPEN
This message displays on some vehicles when the
hood is not closed properly. Close the hood completely.
This message displays along with a continuous chime
when the engine has overheated. Stop and turn the
engine off immediately to avoid severe engine damage.
ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE
This message displays when the outside air temperature
is cold enough to create icy road conditions. Adjust
your driving accordingly.
3-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
LIFTGATE OPEN
REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE
This message displays when the liftgate is not closed
page 2-9.
This message displays while matching a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “HOLD STEM TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY”
more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
REMOTE KEY LEARNING COMPLETE
This message displays while matching a Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle.
See “HOLD STEM TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY”
more information.
This message displays when the vehicle’s engine
oil pressure is low. The oil pressure light also appears
on the instrument panel cluster. See Oil Pressure
REPLACE REMOTE KEY FOB
BATTERY
This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter battery is low. The battery needs to be
replaced in the transmitter. See ″Battery Replacement″
on page 2-5.
Stop the vehicle immediately, as engine damage can
result from driving a vehicle with low oil pressure. Have
the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon
as possible when this message is displayed.
SERVICE A/C (Air Conditioning)
SYSTEM
This message displays when there is a problem
detected in the air conditioning system. Have the vehicle
serviced by your dealer/retailer.
PASSENGER DOOR OPEN
This message displays when one or more of the
passenger doors are not closed properly. Close the
doors completely.
3-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE AIR BAG
SERVICE POWER STEERING
This message displays when there is a problem with
the airbag system. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer immediately. See Airbag Readiness
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the power steering. See Steering
on page 4-9 for more information.
SERVICE STABILITRAK
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
This message displays if there has been a problem
detected with the Electronic Stability Program (ESP).
A warning light also appears on the instrument
panel cluster. See Traction Control System (TCS)
This message displays and a chime sounds when the
brake fluid level is low. The brake system warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster when
this message appears on the DIC. See Brake System
serviced by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
If this message turns on while you are driving, pull off
the road as soon as possible and stop carefully. Try
resetting the system by turning the ignition off and then
back on. If this message still stays on or turns back on
again while you are driving, your vehicle needs service.
Have the system inspected by your dealer/retailer as
soon as possible.
SERVICE HILL START ASSIST
This message displays if there is a problem with the
hill start assist function. Have your vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer.
SERVICE HYBRID SYSTEM
This message displays if the hybrid components need
to be serviced. Have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer/retailer.
3-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SERVICE TIRE MONITORING SYSTEM
SERVICE TRANSMISSION
This message displays if a part on the Tire Pressure
Monitor System (TPMS) is not working properly. The tire
pressure light also flashes and then remains on during
page 3-35. Several conditions may cause this message
page 5-55 for more information. If the warning comes on
and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS.
See your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when there is a problem with the
transmission. See your dealer/retailer for service.
SERVICE VEHICLE SOON
This message displays when a non-emissions related
malfunction occurs. Have the vehicle serviced by
your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
SPEED LIMITED TO XXX MPH (KM/H)
SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL
This message displays when your vehicle speed is
limited to 80 mph (128 km/h) because the vehicle detects
a problem in the speed variable assist steering system.
Have your vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer.
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) is not functioning properly. A warning
light also appears on the instrument panel cluster.
page 4-7 for more information. Have the TCS serviced
by your dealer/retailer as soon as possible.
STABILITRAK NOT READY
This message may display and a warning light on the
instrument panel cluster may be on after first driving the
vehicle and exceeding 30 mph (48 km/h) for 30 seconds.
page 3-34. The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is not
functional until the light has turned off. See Electronic
3-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STABILITRAK OFF
TIGHTEN GAS CAP
This message displays any time the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP) turns off. When this message has been
displayed, the system is no longer available to assist
you with directional control of the vehicle. Adjust your
driving accordingly. See Electronic Stability Program
on page 4-8.
This message may display along with the check engine
light on the instrument panel cluster if the vehicle’s fuel
cap is not tightened properly. See Malfunction Indicator
determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly
installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to
evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with
the cap properly installed should turn this light and
message off.
This message displays only while the ignition is in
ON/RUN.
Any of the following conditions may cause the system to
turn off:
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE
• The system is turned off by pressing and holding
the ESP/TCS button. See Electronic Stability
This message displays when the Tire Pressure Monitor
System (TPMS) is re-learning the tire positions on
your vehicle. The tire positions must be re-learned after
rotating the tires or after replacing a tire or sensor.
information.
• The battery is low.
• There is a system failure. See your dealer/retailer
for service.
3-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TRACTION CONTROL OFF
TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns off. See Traction Control
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed
on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with overheated
transmission fluid or while the transmission
temperature warning is displayed.
This message only displays while the ignition is in
ON/RUN and disappears after 10 seconds, unless
it is acknowledged or an urgent warning appears.
Any of the following conditions may cause the TCS to
turn off:
• The TCS is turned off by pressing the ESP/TCS
page 4-7 for more information.
This message displays along with a chime if the
transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the
transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage
to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the
transmission to cool. This message clears and the chime
stops when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
• The battery is low.
• There is a TCS failure. See your dealer/retailer for
service.
TURN SIGNAL ON
TRACTION CONTROL ON
This message displays when the Traction Control
System (TCS) turns on. See Traction Control
This message displays as a reminder to turn off the turn
signal if you drive your vehicle for more than about
3/4 mile (1.2 km) with a turn signal on. See Turn and
3-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
While your vehicle is parked:
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then
read the pages following to familiarize yourself with
its features.
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls if the vehicle has them.
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player, CB
radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make sure
that it can be added by checking with your dealer/
retailer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can be
added, it is very important to do it properly. Added
sound equipment may interfere with the operation of
your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems, and
even damage them. Your vehicle’s systems may
interfere with the operation of sound equipment
that has been added.
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
Your vehicle has a feature called Retained Accessory
Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system can be played
even after the ignition is turned off. See Retained
information.
3-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
Setting the Clock
left © SEEK arrow or s REV button,
or turn the f knob, located on the upper right
With Date Display
Radio with Single CD or
Radio with CD (MP3)
side of the radio.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
date press the H button while the radio is on. The date
display times out after a few seconds and goes back
to the normal radio and time display.
These radios have a H button for setting the time
and date.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. Press the O knob, located in
the center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD,
YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year)
displays.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once
the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton is
pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or \ FWD
selected default, or let the screen time out.
button.
3-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The date does not automatically display. To see the
Radio with Six-Disc CD (MP3)
This type of radio has a MENU button instead of
the H button to set the time and date.
date press the MENU button and then the H button
while the radio is on. The date display times out after a
few seconds and goes back to the normal radio and
time display.
To set the time and date, follow these instructions:
To change the time default setting from 12 hour to
24 hour or to change the date default setting from
month/day/year to day/month/year, follow these
instructions:
1. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY
or ON/RUN. Press the O knob, located in
the center of the radio, to turn the radio on.
2. Press the MENU button. Once the clock option is
displayed.
1. Press the H button and then the pushbutton
located under the forward arrow label. Once
the time 12H and 24H, and the date MM/DD/YYYY
(month, day, and year) and DD/MM/YYYY (day,
month, and year) displays.
3. Press the pushbutton located under that label.
The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY displays.
4. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the
labels to be changed. Every time the pushbutton
is pressed again, the time or the date if selected,
increases by one.
2. Press the pushbutton located under the desired
option.
3. Press the H or MENU button again to apply the
• Another way to increase the time or date, is to
selected default, or let the screen time out.
press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or \ FWD
button.
• To decrease the time or date, press the
left © SEEK arrow or s REV button,
or turn the f knob, located on the upper
right side of the radio.
3-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Playing the Radio
Radio(s)
O (Power/Volume): Press to turn the system on
and off.
Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or
decrease the volume.
Finding a Station
BAND: Press to switch between AM, FM, or XM™
(if equipped). The display shows the selection.
f (Tune): Turn to select radio stations.
© SEEK ¨: Press the either arrow to go to the
previous or to the next station.
Radio with CD shown,
To scan stations, press and hold either arrow for a
few seconds until a beep sounds. The radio goes to
a station, plays for a few seconds, then goes to the next
station. Press either arrow again to stop scanning.
Radio with Six-Disc CD similar
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
The RDS feature is available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information. This system relies upon
receiving specific information from these stations and
only works when the information is available. While the
radio is tuned to an FM-RDS station, the station name or
call letters displays. In rare cases, a radio station can
broadcast incorrect information that causes the radio
features to work improperly. If this happens, contact the
radio station.
The radio only seeks and scans stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
3-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Each page of favorites can contain any combination of
AM, FM, or XM™ (if equipped) stations. To store a station
as a favorite, perform the following steps:
4 (Information) (XM™ Satellite Radio Service, MP3,
and RDS Features): Press to display additional
text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM™
station, or MP3 song. A choice of additional information
such as: Channel, Song, Artist, CAT (category) can
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under any one of
the labels and the information about that label displays.
1. Tune to the desired radio station.
2. Press the FAV button to display the page where
you want the station stored.
3. Press and hold one of the six pushbuttons until a
beep sounds. When that pushbutton is pressed
and released, the station that was set, returns.
When information is not available, No Info displays.
4. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton radio station
you want stored as a favorite.
Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite
Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station
favorites while the vehicle is parked. Tune to your
favorite stations using the presets, favorites button,
and steering wheel controls, if your vehicle has them.
The number of favorites pages can be setup using
the MENU button. To setup the number of favorites
pages, perform the following steps:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be
programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons
positioned below the radio station frequency labels and
by using the FAV button (radio favorites page). Press
the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites,
each having six favorite stations available per page.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the FAV 1-6
label.
3. Select the desired number of favorites pages
by pressing the pushbutton located below the
displayed page numbers.
4. Press the FAV button, or let the menu time out, to
return to the original main radio screen showing the
radio station frequency labels and to begin the
process of programming your favorites for the
chosen amount of numbered pages.
3-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
EQ (Equalization): Press to select preset equalization
Setting the Tone
(Bass/Midrange/Treble)
settings.
To return to the manual mode, press the EQ button until
Manual displays or manually adjust the bass, midrange,
BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To
adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until
the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to
highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton
or treble by pressing the f knob.
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob
clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted
setting. You can also adjust the highlighted setting
BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or
fade, press the tune knob until the speaker control labels
display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label,
or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired
by pressing either SEEK arrow, \ FWD (forward),
or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are
obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak, or has static,
decrease the treble.
label. Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise
to adjust the highlighted setting. The highlighted setting
can also be adjusted by pressing either SEEK arrow,
\ FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels
To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle
position, press the pushbutton positioned under the
BASS, MID, or TREB label for more than two seconds.
A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle
position.
are obtained.
To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position,
press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE
label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the
level adjusts to the middle position.
To quickly adjust all tone and speaker controls to
the middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
To quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the
middle position, press the f knob for more than
two seconds until a beep sounds.
3-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Undesired XM™ categories can be removed through
the setup menu. To remove an undesired category,
perform the following:
Finding a Category (CAT) Station
CAT (Category): The CAT button is used to find XM™
stations when the radio is in the XM™ mode. To find
XM™ channels within a desired category, perform
the following:
1. Press the MENU button to display the radio
setup menu.
2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT
label.
1. Press the BAND button until the XM™ frequency
displays. Press the CAT button to display the
category labels on the radio display. Continue
pressing the CAT button until the desired category
name displays.
3. Turn the f knob to display the category you want
removed.
4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove
label until the category name along with the word
Removed displays.
2. Press either of the two buttons below the desired
category label to immediately tune to the first
XM™ station associated with that category.
5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories.
3. Turn the f knob, press the buttons below the right
or left arrows displayed, or press either SEEK arrow
to go to the previous or to the next XM™ station
within the selected category.
Removed categories can be restored by pressing the
pushbutton under the Add label when a removed
category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton
under the Restore All label.
4. To exit the category search mode, press the FAV
button or BAND button to display your favorites
again.
The radio does not let you remove or add categories
while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
3-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
Playing a CD (Single CD Player)
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in the
48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces.
XM™ Satellite Radio has a wide variety of programming
and commercial-free music, coast-to-coast, and in
digital-quality sound. During your trial or when you
subscribe, you will get unlimited access to XM™ Radio
Online for when you are not in your vehicle. A service
fee is required to receive the XM™ service. For more
information, contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or
call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S. and www.xmradio.ca
or call 1-877-438-9677 in Canada.
Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The
player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing.
Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player)
LOAD ^: Press to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player holds up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Press and release the ^ button.
2. Wait for the message to insert the disc.
Radio Messages for XM™ Only
section for further detail.
3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,
label side up. The player pulls the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
Radio Messages
1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds.
Calibration Error: The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If Calibration
Error displays, it means that the radio has not been
configured properly for your vehicle and it must be
returned to your dealer/retailer for service.
A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays.
2. Follow the displayed instruction on when to insert
the discs. The CD player takes up to six CDs.
3. Press the ^ button again to cancel loading
more CDs.
Locked: This message displays when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up the radio.
Take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service.
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio
is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped,
if it was the last selected audio source.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer.
3-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays on
the CD. As each new track starts to play, the track
number displays.
Care of Your CD Player
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and
the smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
To prevent contaminating the lens of the disc optics with
lubricants internal to the player mechanism the use of
disc lens cleaners is not advised.
Care of Your CDs
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduced due
to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality of
the music that has been recorded, and the way the CD-R
has been handled. Handle them carefully. Store CD-R(s)
in their original cases or other protective cases and away
from direct sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the
bottom surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is
damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the
CD does not play properly or not at all. Do not touch the
bottom side of a CD while handling it; this could damage
the surface. Pick up CDs by grasping the outer edges or
the edge of the hole and the outer edge.
Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than
one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an
attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs,
the CD player could be damaged. While using the
CD player, use only CDs in good condition without
any label, load one CD at a time, and keep the
CD player and the loading slot free of foreign
materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later in this
section.
Z EJECT: To eject the CD that is currently playing,
press and release this button. A beep sounds and
Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove
Disc displays. The CD can be removed. If the CD is not
removed, after several seconds, the CD automatically
pulls back into the player and begins playing.
If the surface of a CD is soiled, take a soft, lint free
cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth in a mild, neutral
detergent solution mixed with water, and clean it.
Make sure the wiping process starts from the center
to the edge.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold Z for
two seconds to eject all discs.
3-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To play tracks from all CDs loaded in a six-disc CD
player in random order, press the pushbutton
f (Tune): Turn to select tracks on the CD currently
playing.
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press again to turn off random play.
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either the
left or right arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
the tracks on the CD.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a CD is
playing. The CD remains inside the radio for future
listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when
listening to the radio. The CD icon and track number
displays when a CD is in the player.
s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track.
The elapsed time of the track displays.
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. You can connect
an external audio device such as a portable audio player
to the auxiliary input jack for use as another source
for playing CDs.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within a track. You will hear sound
at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing
the track. The elapsed time of the track displays.
Press the CD/AUX button again and the system begins
playing audio from the connected portable audio player.
If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Input
Device Found” displays.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks
can be listened to in random, rather than sequential
order, on one CD or all CDs in a six-disc CD player.
To use random, do one of the following:
Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
Your vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3 feature.
If it has this feature, it is capable of playing an MP3
CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how
to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see Using
• To play the tracks from the CD you are listening to
in random order, press the pushbutton positioned
under the RDM label until Random Current Disc
displays. Press again to turn off random play.
3-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD Messages
Using the Auxiliary Input Jack
Your radio system has an auxiliary input jack located on
the lower right side of the faceplate. This is not an audio
output; do not plug the headphone set into the front
auxiliary input jack. An external audio device such as an
iPod, laptop computer, MP3 player, CD changer, etc. can
be connected to the auxiliary input jack for use as another
audio source.
CHECK DISC: If this message displays and/or the CD
comes out, it could be:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device
while the vehicle is in PARK (P). See Defensive Driving
on page 4-3 for more information on driver distraction.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour and
try again.
To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm
(1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack.
When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX
button to begin playing audio from the device over
the vehicle speakers.
• There could have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label could be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume
of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments
might have to be made from the portable device if
the volume is not loud or soft enough.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your dealer/retailer. If the radio
displays an error message, write it down and provide
it to your dealer/retailer when reporting the problem.
BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a portable
audio device is playing. The portable audio device
continues playing, so you might want to stop it or
power it off.
3-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD when a
portable audio device is playing. Press again and
the system begins playing audio from the connected
portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays.
MP3 Format
If you burn your own MP3 disc on a personal computer:
• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on a CD-R
or CD-RW disc.
• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 files on
one disc.
Using an MP3
• The CD player is able to read and play a maximum
of 50 folders, 50 playlists, and 255 files.
MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc
The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a
CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with
the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps,
64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps,
160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps
or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album
are available for display by the radio when recorded using
ID3 tags version 1 and 2.
• Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find
songs while driving. Organize songs by albums
using one folder for each album. Each folder
or album should contain 18 songs or less.
• Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to
eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total
number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce
the complexity and confusion in trying to locate
a particular folder during playback.
Compressed Audio
The radio also plays discs that contain both
uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files.
By default the radio reads only the uncompressed audio
and ignore the MP3 files. Pressing the CAT (category)
button toggles between compressed and uncompressed
audio format.
• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wpl extension,
other file extensions may not work.
3-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Minimize the length of the file, folder or playlist
names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a
combination of a large number of files and folders,
or playlists can cause the player to be unable to play
up to the maximum number of files, folders, playlists,
or sessions. If you wish to play a large number of
files, folders, playlists or sessions, minimize the
length of the file, folder, or playlist name. Long
names also take up more space on the display,
potentially getting cut off.
Root Directory
The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as
a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files,
the directory displays as F1 ROOT. All files contained
directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any
root directory folders. However, playlists (Px) are always
accessed before root folders or files.
Empty Directory or Folder
If a root directory or a folder exists somewhere in
the file structure that contains only folders/subfolders
and no compressed files directly beneath them, the
player advances to the next folder in the file structure
that contains compressed audio files. The empty folder
does not display.
• Finalize the audio disc before you burn it. Trying to
add music to an existing disc can cause the disc not
to function in the player.
Playlists can be changed by using the previous and
next folder buttons, the tune knob, or the SEEK arrows.
You can also play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that was
recorded using no file folders. If a CD-R or CD-RW
contains more than the maximum of 50 folders,
50 playlists, and 255 files, the player lets you access
and navigate up to the maximum, but all items over
the maximum are not accessible.
No Folder
When the CD contains only compressed files, the files
are located under the root folder. The next and previous
folder functions do not display on a CD that was
recorded without folders or playlists. When displaying
the name of the folder the radio displays ROOT.
When the CD contains only playlists and compressed
audio files, but no folders, all files are located under
the root folder. The folder down and up buttons searches
playlists (Px) first and then go to the root folder.
When the radio displays the name of the folder the
radio displays ROOT.
3-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Order of Play
Preprogrammed Playlists
Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in
the following order:
Preprogrammed playlists that were created by
WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software
can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited
using the radio. These playlists are treated as special
folders containing compressed audio song files.
• Play begins from the first track in the first playlist
and continues sequentially through all tracks in
each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist
has played, play continues from the first track of
the first playlist.
Playing an MP3
Insert a CD-R or CD-RW partway into the slot (Single
CD Player), or press the ^ button and wait for the
message to insert disc (Six-Disc CD Player), label side
up. The player pulls it in, and the CD-R or CD-RW
should begin playing.
• Play begins from the first track in the first folder
and continues sequentially through all tracks in each
folder. When the last track of the last folder has been
played, play continues from the first track of the first
folder.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD-R or
CD-RW in the player, it stays in the player. When the
ignition or radio is turned on, the CD-R or CD-RW starts
to play where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio
source.
When play enters a new folder, the display does not
automatically show the new folder name unless
the folder mode is chosen as the default display.
The new track name displays.
File System and Naming
As each new track starts to play, the track number and
song title displays.
The song name that is displayed is the song name
that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not
present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file
name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the
track name.
Z EJECT: Press and release to eject the CD-R or
CD-RW that is playing. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc
displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays.
The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or
CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R
or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player and
begins playing.
Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages
are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of
text and the extension of the filename does not display.
3-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
For the Six-Disc CD player, press and hold this button for
two seconds to eject all discs.
\ FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance
playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard
at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the file.
The elapsed time of the file displays.
f (Tune): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD-R or
CD-RW currently playing.
RDM (Random): With the random setting, the MP3 files
on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random,
rather than sequential order, on one CD-R/CD-RW or all
discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of
the following:
© SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current MP3 file, if more than ten seconds have
played. Press the right arrow to go to the next MP3 file.
If either arrow is held or pressed multiple times, the
player continues moving backward or forward through
MP3 files on the CD.
1. To play MP3 files from the CD-R or CD-RW
you are listening to in random order, press the
pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until
Random Current Disc displays. Press the same
pushbutton again to turn off random play.
S c (Previous Folder): Press the pushbutton
positioned under the Folder label to go to the first track
in the previous folder.
2. To play songs from all CDs loaded in a six-disc
CD player in random order, press the pushbutton
positioned under the RDM label until Randomize All
Discs displays. Press the same pushbutton again to
turn off random play.
c T (Next Folder): Press the pushbutton positioned
under the Folder label to go to the first track in the
next folder.
s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse
playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound is heard at
a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the
file. The elapsed time of the file displays.
3-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To change from playback by artist to playback by album,
press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label.
From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the
album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label
to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the
album name is displayed on the second line between the
arrows and songs from the current album begins to play.
Once all songs from that album are played, the player
moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the
CD-R/CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from that
album.
h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator
feature to play MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order
by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below
the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to
sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information.
It can take several minutes to scan the disc depending on
the number of MP3 files recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW.
The radio can begin playing while it is scanning the disc
in the background. When the scan is finished, the CD-R
or CD-RW begins playing again.
Once the disc has been scanned, the player defaults to
playing MP3 files in order by artist. The current artist
playing is shown on the second line of the display
between the arrows. Once all songs by that artist are
played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical
order on the CD-R/CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files
by that artist. If you want to listen to MP3 files by another
artist, press the pushbutton located below either arrow
button. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in
alphabetical order. Continue pressing either button
until the desired artist is displayed.
To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton
below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio while a
CD is playing. The inactive CD remains inside the radio
for future listening.
CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message
showing disc and/or track number displays while a CD
is in the player. Press this button again and the system
automatically searches for an auxiliary input device such
as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is
not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays.
3-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
No CAT Info: No category information is available at
this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
XM Radio Messages
XL (Explicit Language Channels): These channels,
or any others, can be blocked at a customer’s request,
by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
No Information: No text or informational messages are
available at this time on this channel. The system is
working properly.
XM Updating: The encryption code in the receiver is
being updated, and no action is required. This process
should take no longer than 30 seconds.
CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for
the selected category. The system is working properly.
No XM Signal: The system is functioning correctly,
but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM™
signal. When you move into an open area, the signal
should return.
XM TheftLocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle
could have previously been in another vehicle. For
security purposes, XM receivers cannot be swapped
between vehicles. If this message appears after having
your vehicle serviced, check with your dealer/retailer.
Loading XM: The audio system is acquiring and
processing audio and text data. No action is needed.
This message should disappear shortly.
XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0, this message
alternates with the XM Radio eight digit radio ID label.
This label is needed to activate the service.
Channel Off Air: This channel is not currently in
service. Tune to another channel.
Unknown: If this message is received when tuned to
channel 0, there could be a receiver fault. Consult
with your dealer/retailer.
Channel Unavail: This previously assigned channel
is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If
this station was one of the presets, choose another
station for that preset button.
Check XM Receivr: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this
time on this channel. The system is working properly.
XM Not Available: If this message does not clear
within a short period of time, the receiver could have a
fault. Consult with your dealer/retailer.
No Title Info: No song title information is available
at this time on this channel. The system is working
properly.
3-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, press and hold
the thumbwheel for longer than one second to interact
on page 2-33 in this manual for more information.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
Some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering
wheel. They include the
following:
Radio Reception
Frequency interference and static can occur during
normal radio reception if items such as cell phone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external
electronic devices are plugged into the accessory
power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug
the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
+ / − (Next/Previous): Press and release either the +
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations boost the power levels
during the day, and then reduce these levels during the
night. Static can also occur when things like storms and
power lines interfere with radio reception. When this
happens, try reducing the treble on the radio.
or − to go to the next or the previous preset radio station.
When a CD is playing, press and release either the +
or − to go to the next or the previous track.
For vehicles with the OnStar® system, press the minus
(previous) button to end a Hands-Free call, an OnStar®
call, cancel an incoming call, or end the Advisor
Playback.
FM Stereo
3 (Volume): Move the thumbwheel up or down to
increase or to decrease the volume.
FM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signals only
reach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tall buildings
or hills can interfere with FM signals, causing the
sound to fade in and out.
Press and release the thumbwheel to mute the system.
Press it again to turn the sound back on.
3-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of the vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall
buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition,
traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges,
garages, or through tunnels could cause loss of the
XM signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO XM SIGNAL to indicate interference.
If the vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of the vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make
sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
Fixed Mast Antenna
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever become
slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the mast is badly
bent, replace it.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the antenna base. If tightening is required,
tighten by hand.
3-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
3-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In fact, most serious injuries and fatalities to unbelted
occupants can be reduced or prevented by the use
of safety belts. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person
is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing
a seat belt. In addition, avoiding excessive speed,
sudden or abrupt turns, and drunken or aggressive
driving can help make trips safer and avoid the
possibility of a crash, especially a rollover crash.
This section provides many useful tips to help you
drive more safely.
Your Driving, the Road,
and Your Vehicle
Driving Your Vehicle
Whenever we drive, we are taking on an
important responsibility. This is true for any motor
vehicle — passenger car, van, truck, sport utility.
Driver behavior, the driving environment, and the
vehicle’s design all affect how well a vehicle performs.
But statistics show that the most important factor,
by far, is how we drive.
Driving Environment
You can also help avoid a rollover or other type of
crash by being prepared for driving in inclement
weather, at night, or during other times where
visibility or traction may be limited, such as on
curves, slippery roads, or hilly terrain. Unfamiliar
surroundings can also have hidden hazards.
Knowing how these three factors work together can
help you understand how your vehicle handles and
what you can do to avoid many types of crashes,
including a rollover crash.
Driver Behavior
The single most important thing is this: everyone in
the vehicle, including the driver, should buckle up.
To help you learn more about driving in different
conditions, this section contains information about
city, freeway, and off-road driving, as well as other
hints for driving in various weather conditions.
4-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Vehicle Design
Defensive Driving
According to the U.S. Department of Transportation,
utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover
rate than other types of vehicles. Utility vehicles do
have higher ground clearance and a narrower track
or shorter wheelbase than passenger cars, to make
them more capable for off-road driving. Specific
design characteristics like these give the driver a
better view of the road, but also give utility vehicles
a higher center of gravity than other types of vehicles.
This means that you should not expect a utility vehicle
to handle the same way a vehicle with a lower center
of gravity, like a car, would in similar situations.
Defensive driving means “always expect the
unexpected.” The first step in driving defensively
is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts:
{CAUTION:
Assume that other road users (pedestrians,
bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be
careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what
they might do and be ready. In addition:
But driver behavior factors are far more often the cause
of a utility vehicle rollover than are environmental or
vehicle factors. Safe driver behavior and understanding
the environment in which you will be driving can
help avoid a rollover crash in any type of vehicle,
including utility vehicles.
• Allow enough following distance between
you and the driver in front of you.
• Focus on the task of driving.
Driver distraction can cause collisions
resulting in injury or possible death. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
4-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Police records show that almost 40 percent of all
motor vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most
cases, these deaths are the result of someone who
was drinking and driving. In recent years, more
than 17,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths
have been associated with the use of alcohol, with
about 250,000 people injured.
Drunk Driving
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness,
and judgment can be affected by even a
small amount of alcohol. You can have a
serious — or even fatal — collision if you
drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive
or ride with a driver who has been drinking.
Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a
group, designate a driver who will not drink.
For persons under 21, it is against the law in every
U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical,
psychological, and developmental reasons for
these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive.
Medical research shows that alcohol in a person’s
system can make crash injuries worse, especially
injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means
that when anyone who has been drinking — driver
or passenger — is in a crash, that person’s chance of
being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if
the person had not been drinking.
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving
is a global tragedy.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to
drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination,
vision, and attentiveness.
4-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
travels 66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance
in an emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
Control of a Vehicle
The following three systems help to control your vehicle
while driving — brakes, steering, and accelerator. At
times, as when driving on snow or ice, it is easy to ask
more of those control systems than the tires and road can
provide. Meaning, you can lose control of your vehicle.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement or
gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is wet, dry,
or icy; tire tread; the condition of the brakes; the weight
of the vehicle; and the amount of brake force applied.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is
a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool
between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much
faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you keep pace
with the traffic and allow realistic following distances,
you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary braking.
That means better braking and longer brake life.
Braking
Braking action involves perception time and reaction
time. First, you have to decide to push on the brake
pedal. That is perception time. Then you have to bring
up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.
If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you are driving,
brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If you do,
the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it can take longer to stop and the
brake pedal will be harder to push.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of
a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h)
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can
affect your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories
4-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ABS can change the brake pressure faster than any
driver could. The computer is programmed to make the
most of available tire and road conditions. This can
help you steer around the obstacle while braking hard.
Antilock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS),
an advanced electronic braking system that will
help prevent a braking skid.
As you brake, the computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
When you start the engine and begin to drive away,
ABS will check itself. You might hear a momentary
motor or clicking noise while this test is going on,
and you might even notice that the brake pedal
moves a little. This is normal.
Remember: ABS does not change the time you need to
get your foot up to the brake pedal or always decrease
stopping distance. If you get too close to the vehicle
in front of you, you will not have time to apply the brakes
if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops. Always leave
enough room up ahead to stop, even though you
have ABS.
If there is a problem
with ABS, this warning
light will stay on.
See Anti-lock Brake
Using ABS
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let antilock work for you. You might
hear the antilock pump or motor operate, and feel the
brake pedal pulsate, but this is normal.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving
safely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you.
You slam on the brakes and continue braking.
Here is what happens with ABS:
Braking in Emergencies
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each wheel.
With ABS, you can steer and brake at the same time.
In many emergencies, steering can help you more than
even the very best braking.
4-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The TCS button
is located on the
instrument panel.
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle has a Traction Control System (TCS)
that limits wheel spin. This is especially useful in
slippery road conditions. The system operates only
if it senses that one or both of the front wheels
are spinning or beginning to lose traction. When this
happens, the system reduces engine power to limit
wheel spin. You may feel or hear the system working,
but this is normal.
Press this button briefly to turn off the TCS. The
TCS warning light will be displayed on the instrument
panel. The traction control system can be activated
again by pressing the traction control button.
This light will flash
when your traction
control system is
limiting wheel spin.
If the system is limiting wheel spin when you press
the button, the system will not turn off until there is
no longer a current need to limit wheel spin. You can
turn the system back on at any time by pressing
the button again. If the TCS light does not come on,
you may not have traction control and your vehicle
should be serviced at a dealer/retailer.
The traction control system automatically comes
on whenever you start your vehicle. To limit wheel
spin, especially in slippery road conditions, you
should always leave the system on. But you can turn
the traction control system off if you ever need to.
You should turn the system off if your vehicle ever
gets stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow and rocking the
vehicle is required. See Rocking Your Vehicle to Get
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, this light will
be on solid. When the light is on solid, the system
will not assist the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle. Adjust your driving accordingly.
Electronic Stability Program
Your vehicle has an Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
system which combines antilock brake, traction and
stability control systems and helps the driver maintain
directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system
automatically comes on whenever you start your vehicle.
To assist the driver with vehicle directional control,
especially in slippery road conditions, you should
always leave the system on. You can turn ESP off if
you ever need to.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems. You may hear or
feel the system working. This is normal and does not
mean there is a problem with your vehicle.
The ESP/TCS button
is located on the
instrument panel.
This light is located
on the instrument
panel cluster.
The Traction Control System (TCS) can be turned off or
back on by pressing the ESP/TCS button. To disable
both ESP and TCS, press and hold the button until the
ESP/TCS warning light turns on solid.
It will flash when the ESP system is both on and
activated.
4-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it.
Steering
Electric Power Steering
If the engine stalls while you are driving, the power
steering assist system will continue to operate until
you are able to stop your vehicle. If you lose power
steering assist because the electric power steering
system is not functioning, you can steer, but it will
take more effort.
ESP may also turn off automatically if it determines
that a problem exists with the system. The ESP/TCS
warning light will be on solid to warn the driver that
ESP is disabled and requires service. If the problem
does not clear itself after restarting the vehicle,
you should see your dealer/retailer for service.
If you turn the steering wheel in either direction several
times until it stops, or hold the steering wheel in the
stopped position for an extended amount of time,
you may notice a reduced amount of power steering
assist. The normal amount of power steering assist
should return shortly after a few normal steering
movements.
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
begins to assist the driver maintain directional control
of the vehicle, the ESP/TCS light will flash and the
cruise control will automatically disengage. When road
conditions allow you to use cruise again, you may
re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11.
The electric power steering system does not require
regular maintenance. If you suspect steering system
problems and/or the Service Vehicle Soon light comes
on, contact your dealer/retailer for service repairs.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adding the sudden acceleration can demand too
much of those places. You can lose control.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned
on the news happen on curves. Here is why:
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the brake or accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the
way you want it to go, and slow down.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce speed when approaching a
curve, do it before you enter the curve, while the
front wheels are straight ahead.
Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the
tires and the road surface, the angle at which the
curve is banked, and your speed. While in a curve,
speed is the one factor you can control.
Try to adjust the speed so you can drive through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve,
and then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to
do their work where the tires meet the road.
Adding non-dealer/non-retailer accessories can affect
your vehicle’s performance. See Accessories and
4-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and
find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly
pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from
between parked cars and stops right in front of you.
You can avoid these problems by braking — if you
can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is
not room. That is the time for evasive action — steering
around the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies
page 4-5. It is better to remove as much speed as
you can from a possible collision. Then steer around
the problem, to the left or right depending on the
space available.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,
and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
4-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off-Road Recovery
Passing
Your vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a
road onto the shoulder while driving.
Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be
dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing:
• Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads
for situations that might affect a successful pass.
If in doubt, wait.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and
lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection.
Never cross a solid or double-solid line on your
side of the lane.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility.
• Wait your turn to pass a slow vehicle.
• When you are being passed, ease to the right.
Loss of Control
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off
the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of the
pavement. Turn the steering wheel up to one-quarter
turn until the right front tire contacts the pavement
edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight
down the roadway.
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to
steer and constantly seek an escape route or area
of less danger.
4-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer
and vehicle control more limited.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid,
too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction,
try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by
shifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes could
cause the tires to slide. You may not realize the
surface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.
Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough
water, ice, or packed snow on the road to make
a mirrored surface — and slow down when you
have any doubt.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any traction control system helps avoid
only the acceleration skid. If your traction control
system is off, then an acceleration skid is also best
handled by easing your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Remember: Any Antilock Brake System (ABS)
helps avoid only the braking skid.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
4-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps.
Driving at Night
• Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out.
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving
because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by
alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by
fatigue.
• Keep your eyes moving, especially during turns
or curves.
Night driving tips include:
• Drive defensively.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But, as we get older, these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver might need at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the
inside rearview mirror.
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
• Slow down and keep more space between
you and other vehicles because headlamps
can only light up so much road ahead.
Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction
and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always
drive slower in these types of driving conditions
and avoid driving through large puddles and
deep-standing or flowing water.
• Watch for animals.
• When tired, pull off the road.
• Do not wear sunglasses.
4-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hydroplaning
{CAUTION:
Hydroplaning is dangerous. Water can build up
under your vehicle’s tires so they actually ride on the
water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle is
hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might
not work as well in a quick stop and could
cause pulling to one side. You could lose
control of the vehicle.
There is no hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when the road is wet.
After driving through a large puddle of
water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the
brake pedal until the brakes work normally.
Other Rainy Weather Tips
Besides slowing down, other wet weather driving tips
include:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong
forces. Driving through flowing water could
cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this
happens, you and other vehicle occupants
could drown. Do not ignore police warnings
and be very cautious about trying to drive
through flowing water.
• Allow extra following distance.
• Pass with caution.
• Keep windshield wiping equipment in good shape.
• Keep the windshield washer fluid reservoir filled.
• Have good tires with proper tread depth.
4-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Keep your eyes moving — scan the road ahead
and to the sides.
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having
it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing.
• Check the rearview mirror and vehicle
instruments often.
Things to check on your own include:
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full?
Hill and Mountain Roads
Windows clean — inside and outside?
Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different
than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving
in these conditions include:
• Wiper Blades: In good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked?
• Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean?
• Keep your vehicle serviced and in good shape.
• Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling
system, and transmission.
• Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated
to recommended pressure?
• Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear.
• Weather and Maps: Safe to travel?
Have up-to-date maps?
{CAUTION:
Highway Hypnosis
Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings
while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find
a safe place to park your vehicle and rest.
If you do not shift down, the brakes could get
so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep
downhill slope.
Other driving tips include:
• Keep the vehicle well ventilated.
• Keep interior temperature cool.
4-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Winter Driving
Here are some tips for winter driving:
{CAUTION:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. The brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down and they
could get so hot that they would not work well.
You would then have poor braking or even
none going down a hill. You could crash.
Always have the engine running and your
vehicle in gear when you go downhill.
• You might want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a supply
of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter outer
clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red cloth, and
reflective warning triangles. And, if you will be driving
under severe conditions, include a small bag of sand,
a piece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags to
help provide traction. Be sure you properly secure
these items in your vehicle.
• Stay in your own lane. Do not swing wide or cut
across the center of the road. Drive at speeds
that let you stay in your own lane.
• Top of hills: Be alert — something could be in
your lane (stalled car, accident).
• Pay attention to special road signs (falling rocks
area, winding roads, long grades, passing or
no-passing zones) and take appropriate action.
4-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it can offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet
the road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires
and the road, you can have a very slippery situation.
You have a lot less traction, or grip, and need to
be very careful.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragile traction.
If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and
polish the surface under the tires even more.
4-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on a
slippery road. Even though you have ABS, begin
stopping sooner than you would on dry pavement.
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in
a serious situation. You should probably stay with your
vehicle unless you know for sure that you are near
help and you can hike through the snow. Here are some
things to do to summon help and keep yourself and
your passengers safe:
• Allow greater following distance on any
slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be
fine until you hit a spot that is covered with ice.
On an otherwise clear road, ice patches can appear
in shaded areas where the sun cannot reach,
such as around clumps of trees, behind buildings,
or under bridges. Sometimes the surface of a
curve or an overpass can remain icy when the
surrounding roads are clear. If you see a patch
of ice ahead of you, brake before you are on it.
Try not to brake while you are actually on the ice,
and avoid sudden steering maneuvers.
• Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
4-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, especially any
that is blocking the exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of the
vehicle that is away from the wind. This will
help keep CO out.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go
a little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you
get and it keeps the battery charged. You will need
a well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and
possibly for signaling later on with the headlamps.
Let the heater run for a while.
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice, or Snow
Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free your
vehicle when stuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow. See
If your vehicle has a traction system, it can often help
to free a stuck vehicle. Refer to your vehicle’s traction
system in the Index. If the stuck condition is too severe
for the traction system to free the vehicle, turn the
traction system off and use the rocking method.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the
engine again and repeat this only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little
as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half
hour or so until help comes.
{CAUTION:
If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at high
speed, they can explode, and you or others
could be injured. The vehicle can overheat,
causing an engine compartment fire or other
damage. Spin the wheels as little as possible
and avoid going above 35 mph (55 km/h) as
shown on the speedometer.
For information about using tire chains on your vehicle,
4-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
Loading Your Vehicle
First, turn the steering wheel left and right to clear
the area around the front wheels. Turn the traction
control system off. See Traction Control System (TCS)
on page 4-7. Then shift back and forth between
REVERSE (R) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels
as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear,
wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting
gears. Release the accelerator pedal while you shift,
and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when
the transmission is in gear. By slowly spinning the
wheels in the forward and reverse directions, you will
cause a rocking motion that could free your vehicle.
If that does not get your vehicle out after a few tries,
it might need to be towed out. If your vehicle does
need to be towed out, see Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-28.
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all
occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed
options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry, the Tire and Loading
Information label and the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you
do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
4-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The tire and loading information label shows the
number of occupant seating positions (A), and the
maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
Tire and Loading Information Label
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see
on page 5-52.
There is also important loading information on
the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and
the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
front and rear axle. See “Certification/Tire Label”
later in this section.
Example Label
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar).
With the driver’s door open, you will find the
label attached below the door lock post (striker).
4-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver
and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load
Example 1
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 1 =
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs and there will be five
Item
Total
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how
this reduces the available cargo and luggage
load capacity of your vehicle.
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
information on towing a trailer, towing safety rules
and trailering tips.
4-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Example 2
Description
Example 3
Description
Item
Total
Item
Total
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 2 =
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for
Example 3 =
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
Subtract
Subtract
B
C
Occupant Weight
750 lbs (340 kg)
250 lbs (113 kg)
B
C
Occupant Weight
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading
information label for specific information about
your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating
positions. The combined weight of the driver,
passengers and cargo should never exceed
your vehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.
4-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, cargo, and trailer tongue
weight, if your vehicle is pulling a trailer.
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the
maximum weights for the front and rear axles,
called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your front and
rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station
and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can
help you with this. Be sure to spread out your
load equally on both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle,
or the GAWR for either the front or rear axle.
Similar looking vehicles may have different
GVWRs and payloads. Please consult your
vehicle’s Certification/Tire label or your retailer
for additional details.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is
attached to the lower area of the center pillar
(B-pillar). The label shows the gross weight
capacity of your vehicle. This is called the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).
4-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Do not load the vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
or either the maximum front or rear
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you
do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it
can change the way your vehicle handles.
These could cause you to lose control
and crash. Also, overloading can shorten
the life of the vehicle.
Things you put inside your vehicle can
strike and injure people in a sudden stop
or turn, or in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like
suitcases, inside the vehicle so that
some of them are above the tops of
the seats.
Using heavier suspension components to get
added durability might not change your vehicle’s
weight ratings. Ask your dealer/retailer to help
you load your vehicle correctly if you are using
these components.
• Do not leave an unsecured child
restraint in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
unless you need to.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like
suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they
will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to
stop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they will
keep going.
4-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are some important things to consider before
you do recreational vehicle towing:
Towing
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Towing Your Vehicle
To avoid vehicle damage, a platform or flatbed trailer
should be used to transport this vehicle. Consult
your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer/retailer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you
would prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll
want to make sure your vehicle is prepared to
be towed. See Before Leaving on a Long Trip
on page 4-16.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as “dinghy towing” (towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground) and “dolly towing”
(towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).
Dinghy Towing
Front-wheel-drive vehicles equipped with a manual or
automatic transmission may be dinghy towed from
the front. These vehicles may also be towed by putting
the front wheels on a dolly. See “Dolly Towing” later
in this section.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing” following in this section.
For vehicles being dinghy towed, the vehicle should
be run at the beginning of each day and at each RV
fuel stop for about five minutes. This will ensure proper
lubrication of transmission components.
4-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you tow your vehicle without performing
each of the steps listed under “Dinghy Towing,”
you could damage the automatic transmission.
Be sure to follow all steps of the dinghy towing
procedure prior to and after towing your vehicle.
Notice: If your vehicle has a four-speed automatic
transmission, it can be dinghy towed from the
front for unlimited miles at 65 mph (105 km/h).
If you exceed 65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your
vehicle, it could be damaged. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Never exceed
65 mph (105 km/h) while towing your vehicle.
Once you have reached your destination:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Reinstall the IGN SW fuse into the instrument panel
fuse block.
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK/OFF and remove
the key from the ignition.
To tow your vehicle from the front with all four wheels
on the ground:
1. Position and attach the vehicle to tow it behind
the recreational vehicle.
2. Turn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn fog lamps and all accessories off.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
the transmission. Be sure that the transmission
fluid is at the proper level before towing with all
four wheels on the ground.
5. Remove the IGN SW fuse from the instrument
panel fuse block. See Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 5-90 for more information.
Notice: Don’t tow a vehicle with the front drive
wheels on the ground if one of the front tires is
a compact spare tire. Towing with two different tire
sizes on the front of the vehicle can cause severe
damage to the transmission.
4-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Dolly Towing (Front-Wheel-Drive
Vehicles)
Towing Your Vehicle From the Rear
Notice: Towing your vehicle from the rear could
damage it. Also, repairs would not be covered
by the warranty. Never have your vehicle towed
from the rear.
To tow your front-wheel-drive vehicle from the front with
two wheels on the ground, do the following:
1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.
2. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
3. Set the parking brake and then remove the key.
4. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-ahead
position with a clamping device designed for towing.
5. Release the parking brake.
4-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped with the
proper trailer towing equipment. To identify the trailering
capacity of your vehicle, you should read the information
in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this
section. Trailering is different than just driving your
vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling,
acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.
Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment,
and it has to be used properly.
Towing a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or
even at all. You and your passengers could
be seriously injured. You may also damage
your vehicle; the resulting repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Pull a trailer
only if you have followed all the steps in this
section. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice
and information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
That is the reason for this part. In it are many
time-tested, important trailering tips and safety rules.
Many of these are important for your safety and that
of your passengers. So please read this section
carefully before you pull a trailer.
Load-pulling components such as the engine,
transmission, rear axle, wheel assemblies and tires are
forced to work harder against the drag of the added
weight. The engine is required to operate at relatively
higher speeds and under greater loads, generating
extra heat. What’s more, the trailer adds considerably
to wind resistance, increasing the pulling requirements.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part and see your dealer/retailer
for important information about towing a trailer
with your vehicle.
4-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• You may want to shift the transmission to a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
Using a lower gear will minimize heat buildup
and extend the life of your transmission.
If You Do Decide to Pull a Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only where
you live but also where you will be driving.
A good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing a trailer.
Do not drive faster than the maximum posted speed
for trailers, or no more than 55 mph (90 km/h),
to save wear on your vehicle’s parts.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Do not tow a trailer when the outside temperature
is above 100°F (38°C).
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged. The
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• the weight of the trailer
repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
• the weight of the trailer tongue
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This
helps your engine and other parts of your
vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.
• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires
4-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Weight of the Trailer
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce
the tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you tow a trailer, you must add the tongue load
to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
for more information about your vehicle’s maximum
load capacity.
It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs (680 kg).
But even that can be too heavy.
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to
pull a trailer are all important. It can also depend on
any special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can
carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in
this section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo must be subtracted
from the maximum trailer weight.
You can ask your dealer/retailer for trailering
information or advice.
4-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry
tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle
to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or
the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect
of additional weight may reduce your trailering capacity
more than the total of the additional weight.
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
If you are using a weight-carrying hitch, the trailer
tongue (A) should weigh 10 percent of the total loaded
trailer weight (B). If you are using a weight-distributing
hitch, the trailer tongue (A) should weigh 12 percent
of the total loaded trailer weight (B).
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailer and
then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are
proper. If they are not, you may be able to get them right
simply by moving some items around in the trailer.
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of
trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight
is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the
rear axle will be greater than just the weight itself, as
much as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle
could be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg).
4-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Since the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg),
you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle without
exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue weight is about
1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing the 900 lbs (408 kg)
by 1.5 leaves you with being able to handle only
600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight. Since tongue weight
is usually at least 10 percent of total loaded trailer
weight, you can expect that the largest trailer your
vehicle can properly handle is 6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
But let us say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does
not exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR,
RGAWR, Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight.
The only way to be sure you are not exceeding any
of these ratings is to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You will find these numbers on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
not go over the GVW limit for your vehicle or the
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), including the
weight of the trailer tongue.
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you may
think that you should subtract 700 additional pounds
(318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay within
GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only be
7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think
you must limit tongue weight to less than 1,000 lbs
(454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But, you
must still consider the effect on the rear axle.
4-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hitches
Trailer Brakes
Since your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, your
trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic
system.
It is important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
Here are some rules to follow:
Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the
trailer brakes, so you will be able to install, adjust and
maintain them properly.
• The rear bumper on your vehicle is not intended
for hitches. Do not attach rental hitches or other
bumper-type hitches to it. Use only a frame-mounted
hitch that does not attach to the bumper.
Driving with a Trailer
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you will want to
get to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
• Will you have to make any holes in the body of your
vehicle when you install a trailer hitch? If you do,
then be sure to seal the holes later when you remove
the hitch. If you do not seal them, deadly carbon
monoxide (CO) from your exhaust can get into
Dirt and water can, too.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
Safety Chains
You should always attach chains between your vehicle
and your trailer. Cross the safety chains under the tongue
of the trailer so that the tongue will not drop to the road if
it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about
safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer
or by the trailer manufacturer. Follow the manufacturer’s
recommendation for attaching safety chains and do not
attach them to the bumper. Always leave just enough
slack so you can turn with your rig. And, never allow
safety chains to drag on the ground.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
4-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
When you are turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer will not strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other
objects. Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers.
Signal well in advance.
Passing
You will need more passing distance up ahead when
you are towing a trailer. And, because you are a
good deal longer when towing a trailer, you will need
to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle
before you can return to your lane.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
When you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need a
different turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.
See your dealer/retailer if you need information.
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash
whenever you signal a turn or lane change. Properly
hooked up, the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other
drivers you are about to turn, change lanes or stop.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that
hand to the left. To move the trailer to the right,
move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly
and, if possible, have someone guide you.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are
not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure
the trailer bulbs are still working.
4-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Driving on Grades
Parking on Hills
Notice: Do not tow on steep continuous grades
exceeding 6 miles (9.6 km). Extended, higher
than normal engine and transmission temperatures
may result and damage your vehicle. Frequent
stops are very important to allow the engine and
transmission to cool.
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you do not
shift down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduce
your speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reduce
the possibility of the engine and the transmission
overheating. If your engine does overheat, see
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brakes, but do not shift into
PARK (P).
When parking uphill, turn your wheels away from
the curb. When parking downhill, turn your wheels
into the curb.
2. Have someone place chocks behind the trailer
wheels.
4-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. When the chocks are in place, release the regular
brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you
are pulling a trailer. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for more information. Things that are
especially important in trailer operation are automatic
transmission fluid (do not overfill), engine oil, axle
lubricant, drive belt, cooling system and brake system.
Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you are trailering,
it is a good idea to review this information before you
start your trip.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. Release the regular brakes.
When You Are Ready to Leave
After Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine,
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
Engine Cooling When Trailer Towing
Your cooling system may temporarily overheat during
severe operating conditions. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-23.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
4-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
✍ NOTES
4-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
5-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessories and Modifications
Service
When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to
your vehicle they can affect your vehicle’s performance
and safety, including such things as, airbags, braking,
stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,
aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like
antilock brakes, traction control and stability control.
Some of these accessories could even cause
For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer.
You will receive genuine Saturn parts and Saturn-trained
and supported service people.
Genuine Saturn parts have one of these marks.
malfunction or damage not covered by warranty.
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your GM
dealer/retailer can accessorize your vehicle using
genuine GM Accessories. When you go to your GM
dealer/retailer and ask for GM Accessories, you
will know that GM-trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine
GM Accessories.
Also, see Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
5-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Doing Your Own Service Work
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including
some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some
component wear by-products contain and/or emit
these chemicals.
{CAUTION:
Never try to do your own service on hybrid
components. You can be injured and your
vehicle can be damaged if you try to do your
own service work. Service and repair of these
hybrid components should only be performed
by a trained service technician with the proper
knowledge and tools.
California Perchlorate Materials
Requirements
Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag
initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries
contained in remote keyless entry transmitters, may
contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may
be necessary. For additional information, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
5-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
{CAUTION:
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and
list the mileage and the date of any service work
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle can
affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise
and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer
performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before
adding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
If you want to do some of your own service work, you
should use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service
Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the
proper maintenance of your vehicle. To help keep the
engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance,
we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline.
5-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you might notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
the engine needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that meet
California specifications. See the underhood emission
control label. If this fuel is not available in states adopting
California emissions standards, your vehicle will operate
satisfactorily on fuels meeting federal specifications, but
emission control system performance might be affected.
The malfunction indicator lamp could turn on and your
vehicle might fail a smog-check test. See Malfunction
authorized dealer/retailer for diagnosis. If it is determined
that the condition is caused by the type of fuel used,
repairs might not be covered by the vehicle warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification
D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in
Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of
for additional information.
5-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for
Additives
low emissions can contain an octane-enhancing
additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where you buy
gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT. We recommend
against the use of such gasolines. Fuels containing MMT
can reduce the life of spark plugs and the performance
of the emission control system could be affected. The
malfunction indicator lamp might turn on. If this occurs,
return to your dealer/retailer for service.
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United States
are now required to contain additives that help prevent
engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing
the emission control system to work properly. In most
cases, you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
However, some gasolines contain only the minimum
amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental
Protection Agency regulations. To help keep fuel injectors
and intake valves clean, or if your vehicle experiences
problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline
that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and
prevent most deposit-related problems.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel might be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in
your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines,
if they comply with the specifications described earlier.
However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing
more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that
were not designed for those fuels.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel that
contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel
system and also damage plastic and rubber parts.
That damage would not be covered under your
warranty.
5-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries
to you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks,
flames, and smoking materials away from fuel.
Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when
refueling your vehicle. This is against the law
in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle
while pumping fuel. Keep children away from
the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel.
Unlock the gas cap door by pressing the door lock
switch located on the driver’s door trim.
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released
too soon, it will spring back to the right. To avoid
gasoline contact on the painted surface of your car
when filling your fuel tank, place the tethered cap
on the fuel filler door.
5-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Fuel can spray out on you if you open the
fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then
something ignites it, you could be badly burned.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly full,
and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel
cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop.
Then unscrew the cap all the way.
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by
shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer/ retailer can get one
for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not
fit properly. This may cause your malfunction
indicator lamp to light and may damage your fuel
tank and emissions system. See Malfunction
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from
painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. This would allow fuel to evaporate
page 3-36.
5-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it
is in your vehicle. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite the fuel vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
• Dispense fuel only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and
other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
• Do not smoke while pumping fuel.
• Do not use a cellular phone while
pumping fuel.
5-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hood Release
To open the hood, do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it. It is
located under the
instrument panel on
the driver side of
the vehicle.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and lift up on the
secondary hood release lever.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are
on properly. Then pull the hood down and close it firmly.
5-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Oil
on page 5-18.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check the engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
page 5-25.
Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-23.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See
the location of the engine oil dipstick.
E. Main Underhood Fuse Block. Contains Remote
Positive (+) Terminal (Under engine cover).
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or
cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down and check the level.
page 5-13.
5-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
When to Add Engine Oil
If the oil is below the MIN (minimum) mark, add at least
one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section
explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase
page 5-98.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere in
the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the
way back in when you are through.
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
upper mark that shows the proper operating range,
the engine could be damaged.
5-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
• American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol
Oils meeting these
requirements should have
the starburst symbol on the
container. This symbol
indicates that the oil has
been certified by the
American Petroleum
Institute (API).
Look for this information on the oil container, and
use only those oils that are identified as meeting GM
Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol on
the front of the oil container.
Look for three things:
• GM6094M
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. Look for and use only an oil
that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is best
for your vehicle.
5-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where
the temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provide easier
cold starting and better protection for the engine at
extremely low temperatures.
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A change engine oil light will come on. See Change
as possible within the next 600 miles (1 000 km). It is
possible that, if you are driving under the best conditions,
the oil life system might not indicate that an oil change is
necessary for over a year. However, the engine oil and
filter must be changed at least once a year and at this
time the system must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has
trained service people who will perform this work using
genuine parts and reset the system. It is also important
to check the oil regularly and keep it at the proper level.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you need for good performance
and engine protection.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must
change the oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your
last oil change. Remember to reset the oil life system
whenever the oil is changed.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you
know when to change the engine oil and filter. This is
based on engine revolutions and engine temperature,
and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the
mileage at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, you
must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever
the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change the oil prior to a change engine oil light
being turned on, reset the system.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that can be
unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long. Clean
your skin and nails with soap and water, or a good hand
cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of clothing or rags
containing used engine oil. See the manufacturer’s
warnings about the use and disposal of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from the
filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting it in
the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers, or into
streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it by taking it
to a place that collects used oil. If you have a problem
properly disposing of used oil, ask your dealer/retailer,
a service station, or a local recycling center for help.
After changing the engine oil, reset the system:
1. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal three
times within five seconds.
If the change engine oil light is not on, the system
is reset.
If the light comes on again and stays on for 30 seconds
at the next ignition cycle, it did not reset. You will
need to reset the system again.
5-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter, do the
following:
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
the location of the engine air cleaner/filter.
1. Unscrew the clamp on
the air duct hose.
When to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
How to Inspect the Engine Air
Cleaner/Filter
To inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filter from
the vehicle and lightly shake the filter to release
loose dust and dirt. If the filter remains caked with
dirt, a new filter is required.
2. Disconnect the hose.
3. Unscrew the four bolts on the side of the air cleaner
assembly.
4. Turn the cover upward to disengage the cover
hinges.
5. Remove the air cleaner cover assembly and air
filter element.
5-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6. Inspect or replace the air filter element.
If the air filter element is dirty, you should replace it.
If it is only dusty, it may be cleaned by blowing
compressed air through it from the clean side.
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
Make sure you are away from the engine
compartment when cleaning the air filter with
compressed air.
Wipe all dust from inside of the housing and inspect
the air cleaner and air outlet duct for cracks, cuts
and deterioration. The air outlet duct must be
replaced if damaged.
7. Reverse Steps 1 through 5 to reinstall the engine
air cleaner/filter cover and air duct hose.
Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfire can
cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirt can easily get
into your engine, which will damage it. Always have
the air cleaner/filter in place when you are driving.
5-19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The following explains your cooling system and how to
add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem with
page 5-23.
Automatic Transmission Fluid
It is not necessary to check the transmission fluid level.
A transaxle fluid leak is the only reason for fluid loss.
If a leak occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer
service department and have it repaired as soon as
possible.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
• Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
• Protect against rust and corrosion.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
sure to use the transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
• Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transaxle
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages may
not be covered by your warranty. Always use the
automatic transaxle fluid listed in Recommended
• Let the warning lights and gages work as they
should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
Engine Coolant
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
5-20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core, and
other parts.
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer/retailer check your cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-12 for more information.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Coolant
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be between the
MIN and MAX lines.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
for instructions on “How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank.”
The surge tank is located on the driver side of the
engine compartment. See Engine Compartment
5-22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of the
vehicle until the engine is cool.
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
If you need to replace your coolant surge tank pressure
cap, see your retailer.
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not
be covered by your warranty.
Engine Overheating
There is a coolant temperature warning light on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
5-23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about ten minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If No Steam Is Coming From Your
Engine
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
If the warning continues and you have not stopped, pull
over, stop, and park your vehicle right away.
• Climb a long hill on a hot day.
• Stop after high-speed driving.
• Idle for long periods in traffic.
• Tow a trailer.
If there is still no sign of steam, idle the engine for
three minutes while you are parked. If the warning
continues, turn off the engine and get everyone out of
the vehicle until it cools down.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
If you get the overheat warning with no sign of steam,
try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. Try to minimize engine load. If you are in a traffic
jam, shift to NEUTRAL (N); otherwise, shift to the
highest gear possible while driving.
5-24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
{CAUTION:
An electric engine cooling fan under the hood
can start up even when the engine is not
running and can injure you. Keep hands,
clothing, and tools away from any underhood
electric fan.
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface.
A. Electric Engine Fan (Not Shown)
B. Coolant Surge Tank
C. Pressure Cap
5-25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The coolant level should be between the MIN and MAX
lines. If it is not, you may have a leak at the radiator
hoses, heater hoses, radiator, water pump, or
somewhere else in the cooling system.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by the warranty. Always
use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill
procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could
cause your engine to overheat and be severely
damaged.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the
vehicle.
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at between the MIN and MAX
lines, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on, check
to see if the electric engine cooling fan is running. If the
engine is overheating, the fan should be running. If it is
not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running the engine
without coolant is not covered by the warranty.
5-26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
Adding only plain water to the cooling system
can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other
liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the
proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s
coolant warning system is set for the proper
coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong
mixture, the engine could get too hot but you
would not get the overheat warning. The engine
could catch fire and you or others could be
burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper radiator
hose, is no longer hot.
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture, to between the
MIN and MAX lines.
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine
cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper DEX-COOL® coolant mixture
to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches
between the MIN and MAX lines.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one-quarter of a turn. If you hear a hiss,
wait for that to stop. This will allow any pressure
still left to be vented out the discharge hose.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight.
5-28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Check the level in the surge tank when the cooling
system has cooled down. If the coolant is not at the
proper level, repeat Steps 1 through 3 and reinstall the
pressure cap. If the coolant still is not at the proper level
when the system cools down again, see your retailer.
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
Windshield Washer Fluid
What to Use
When you need windshield or rear window washer fluid,
be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before
use. If you will be operating your vehicle in an area
where the temperature may fall below freezing, use a
fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing.
• Fill the washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for fluid
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage the vehicle’s
windshield washer system and paint.
Adding Windshield Washer Fluid
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
It is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid. Adding
brake fluid will not correct a leak. If fluid is added when
the linings are worn, there will be too much fluid when
new brake linings are installed. Add or remove brake
fluid, as necessary, only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system.
Brakes
Brake Fluid
The brake master cylinder
reservoir is filled with
DOT-3 brake fluid. See
the location of the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, it can
spill on the engine. The fluid will burn if the
engine is hot enough. You or others could be
burned, and your vehicle could be damaged.
Add brake fluid only when work is done on the
brake hydraulic system.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in
the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the fluid
level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid is
leaking out of the brake hydraulic system. If it is, have
the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means
that sooner or later the brakes will not work well.
When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brake
warning light comes on. See Brake System Warning
5-30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice:
What to Add
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
hydraulic system parts. For example, just a
few drops of mineral-based oil, such as engine
oil, in the brake hydraulic system can damage
brake hydraulic system parts so badly that they
will have to be replaced. Do not let someone
put in the wrong kind of fluid.
When you need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake fluid.
Use new brake fluid from a sealed container only.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep
dirt from entering the reservoir.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged.
Be careful not to spill brake fluid on your
vehicle. If you do, wash it off immediately.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake
hydraulic system, the brakes might not work
well. This could cause a crash. Always use the
proper brake fluid.
5-31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake
squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied.
This does not mean something is wrong with the brakes.
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have
built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning
sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads
are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard
all the time your vehicle is moving, except when you
are pushing on the brake pedal firmly.
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts
in the proper sequence to torque specifications
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
{CAUTION:
Brake Pedal Travel
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon the brakes will not work well. That could
lead to an accident. When you hear the brake
wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
See your dealer/retailer if the brake pedal does not
return to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase
in pedal travel. This could be a sign that brake service
might be required.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you apply the brakes, with or without the
vehicle moving, the brakes adjust for wear.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
5-32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Replacing Brake System Parts
Battery
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together if
the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your vehicle
was designed and tested with top-quality brake parts.
When you replace parts of the braking system — for
example, when the brake linings wear down and you
need new ones put in — be sure you get new approved
replacement parts. If you do not, the brakes might not
work properly. For example, if someone puts in brake
linings that are wrong for your vehicle, the balance
between the front and rear brakes can change — for
the worse. The braking performance you have come
to expect can change in many other ways if someone
puts in the wrong replacement brake parts.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
page 5-34 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Your vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery and a
36-volt hybrid battery system.
5-33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the vehicle is not driven for over
two months, the 36-volt hybrid battery can be
permanently damaged.
12-Volt Battery
When it is time for a new standard 12-volt battery, see
your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement
number shown on the original battery’s label.
The 36-volt battery is located behind the rear seat,
under the cargo floor. If the vehicle is stored for
an extended period of time, drive the vehicle every
two months for about half an hour to keep the 36-volt
hybrid battery charged and in good working condition.
36-Volt Battery System
If you need a new 36-volt hybrid battery system, see
your dealer/retailer.
Jump Starting
Vehicle Storage
Your hybrid vehicle has a standard 12-volt battery in the
engine compartment, and a 36-volt battery under the
rear load floor.
Infrequent Usage: If you drive your vehicle infrequently,
remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−) cable from
the battery, the one that is exposed. This will help keep
the battery from running down.
Extended Storage: For extended storage of your
vehicle, remove the 12-volt battery black, negative (−)
cable from the battery or use a battery trickle charger.
This will help maintain the charge of the battery over an
extended period of time.
{CAUTION:
Personal injury or damage to the vehicle can
result if you try jump starting or using a battery
charger on the 36-volt battery. Use only the
12-volt battery for jump starting and charging.
Remember to reconnect the battery when you are ready
to drive your vehicle.
Notice: The 36-volt hybrid battery system should
be serviced only by a qualified facility to avoid
battery system damage. See your dealer/retailer
if service is needed.
If your vehicle’s standard 12-volt battery has run down,
you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following
steps to do it safely.
5-34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode or
ignite.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
• They contain enough electricity to
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,
set the parking brake firmly on both vehicles
involved in the jump start procedure. Put an
automatic transaxle in PARK (P) or a manual
transaxle in NEUTRAL before setting the parking
brake.
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or
all of these things can hurt you.
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlet. Turn off the
radio and all lamps that are not needed. This will
avoid sparks and help save both batteries. And it
could save the radio!
5-35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open each vehicle’s hood and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations of the
other vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+)
12-volt jump starting terminal and a remote
{CAUTION:
negative (−) jump starting terminal. You should
always use these remote terminals instead of the
terminals on the battery. The remote positive (+)
terminal is located inside the junction box located
above the engine cover. To access the remote
positive (+) terminal, unlatch the box cover.
Using a match near a battery can cause battery
gas to explode. People have been hurt doing
this, and some have been blinded. Use a
flashlight if you need more light.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5. The remote negative (−) terminal is a stud on
the driver side near the underhood fuse block.
5-36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
go to positive (+) or to a remote positive terminal (+)
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal, if the vehicle has one. Do not
connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you will get a
short that would damage the battery and maybe
other parts too.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
7. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the remote
positive (+) terminal of your hybrid vehicle.
8. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to
the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote positive (+) terminal if the other vehicle
has one.
{CAUTION:
9. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until the
next step. The other end of the negative (−) cable
does not go to the dead battery. It goes to your
vehicle’s remote negative (−) terminal. The electrical
connection is just as good there, and the chance
of sparks getting back to the battery is much less.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
6. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose or
missing insulation. If they do, you could get a shock.
The vehicles could be damaged too. Before you
connect the cables to the other vehicle, here are
some basic things you should know. Positive (+) will
10. Try to start the hybrid vehicle.
5-37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles, do
the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the dead battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Close the remote positive junction box cover.
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam
headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly
aimed if the low-beam headlamps are aimed properly.
Headlamp Aiming
The headlamp aiming system has been preset at the
factory.
To adjust the vertical aim, do the following:
If the vehicle is damaged in an accident, the aim of the
headlamps may be affected and adjustment may be
necessary.
for more information.
It is recommended that a dealer/retailer adjust the
headlamps. To re-aim the headlamps yourself, use
the following procedure.
The vehicle should be properly prepared as follows:
• The vehicle should be placed so the headlamps are
25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall.
• The vehicle must have all four tires on a level
surface which is level all the way to the wall.
• The vehicle should be placed so it is perpendicular
to the wall or other flat surface.
• The vehicle should not have any snow, ice, or mud
on it.
• The vehicle should be fully assembled and all
other work stopped while headlamp aiming is
being performed.
2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low-beam
headlamp.
• The vehicle should be normally loaded with a full
tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting
on the driver’s seat.
3. Measure the distance from the ground to the aim
dot on the low-beam headlamp. Record the
distance.
• Tires should be properly inflated.
5-39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. At the wall measure from the ground upward (A) to
the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it.
5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall the
width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in
Step 4.
7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which
are under the hood near each headlamp assembly.
The adjustment screw can be turned with a
E8 Torx® socket.
Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam
cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may
cause excessive heat build-up which may cause
damage to the headlamp.
8. Turn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp
beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. Turn it
clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the
angle of the beam.
6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a
piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the
headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the
beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted
to be seen on the flat surface.
5-40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Bulb Replacement
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this
section, contact your dealer/retailer.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is
positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape
line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct
headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows
the incorrect headlamp aim.
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite
headlamp.
5-41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Headlamps
To replace one of the headlamp bulbs, use the following
procedure. To replace the parking/turn signal lamp
bulb, see Front Turn Signal and Parking Lamps
on page 5-43.
for more information.
2. Remove the two screws from the top of the front
fascia and grille. They are inboard of the headlamp
assembly.
3. Remove the three screws retaining the headlamp
assembly.
4. Insert a flat blade tool through the opening in the
top. Make sure the tool fits through the opening in
the headlamp bracket lower arm.
7. Disconnect the electrical connector from the bulb
assembly.
5. Push the locking tab toward the rear of the vehicle
with the tool to lift the headlamp bracket lower arm.
8. Turn the bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove
it from the housing.
6. Pull back on the front fascia and then pull the
headlamp assembly out from the vehicle. Another
person might be needed to assist with this step.
9. Replace the old bulb with a new one.
10. Reverse Steps 1 through 8 to reinstall.
5-42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket assembly.
4. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket assembly.
Front Turn Signal and Parking
Lamps
5. Insert the bulb assembly into the headlamp
assembly.
To replace a front turn signal or parking lamp bulb:
on page 5-42 to access the front turn signal
or parking lamp.
6. Turn the bulb assembly clockwise until seated.
7. Reverse the steps to reinstall the headlamp
assembly.
2. Turn the bulb to be replaced counterclockwise to
remove it from the headlamp assembly.
5-43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
To replace one of these bulbs:
A. Taillamp/Stoplamp
B. Turn Signal Lamp
C. Back-up Lamp
2. Remove the two screws holding in the taillamp
assembly.
3. Slide the taillamp assembly rearward and away
from the vehicle.
1. Open the liftgate.
4. Turn the bulb socket being replaced
counterclockwise to disconnect it.
5. Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
6. Push the new bulb into the bulb socket.
7. Reverse Steps 2 through 4 to reinstall the taillamp
assembly.
5-44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the
bulb straight out of the socket.
License Plate Lamp
To replace one of these bulbs:
4. Install the new bulb.
1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license
plate lamps to the fascia.
5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the license
plate lamp.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Bulb Number
3156
Front Turn Signal/Parking
Headlamps
3157K
High-beam
9005 or HB3
9006 or HB4
Low-beam/DRL
Rear Turn Signal, Stoplamp and
Taillamp
3057
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact your
dealer/retailer.
2. Turn and pull the license plate lamp forward
through the fascia opening.
5-45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and are
removed in different ways. For proper type and length,
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly do the
following:
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper
arm until you hear the release lever click into
place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, lift the rear wiper arm
from the window and pull the blade.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
5-46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tires
CAUTION: (Continued)
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires
made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever
have questions about your tire warranty and where
to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty
booklet for details.
• Underinflated tires pose the same
danger as overloaded tires. The
resulting accident could cause serious
injury. Check all tires frequently to
maintain the recommended pressure.
Tire pressure should be checked when
your vehicle’s tires are cold. See
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used
tires are dangerous.
• Overloading your vehicle’s tires can
cause overheating as a result of too
much flexing. You could have an
air-out and a serious accident. See
• Overinflated tires are more likely to
be cut, punctured, or broken by a
sudden impact — such as when
you hit a pothole. Keep tires at the
recommended pressure.
• Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If the tire’s tread is badly worn, or
if your vehicle’s tires have been
damaged, replace them.
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed
to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a
TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall.
GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal
safety guidelines.
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustration is an example
of a typical P-Metric tire sidewall.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation):
The Department of Transportation (DOT) code
indicates that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters
and numbers following the DOT code are the Tire
Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the
manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the
tire was manufactured. The TIN is molded onto both
sides of the tire, although only one side may have
the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and
number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based
on three performance factors: treadwear, traction,
and temperature resistance. For more information,
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular
tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction
type, and service description. See the Tire Size
illustration later in this section for more detail.
5-48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit:
Maximum load that can be carried and the
maximum pressure needed to support that load.
For information on recommended tire pressure
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates
the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall
to sidewall.
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that
indicates the tire height-to-width measurements.
For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as
shown in item C, of the illustration, it would mean
that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it
is wide.
Tire Size
The following illustration shows, an example of,
a typical passenger car tire size.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used to
indicate the type of ply construction in the tire. The
letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in
inches.
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a
tire. The load index can range from 1 to 279.
Speed ratings range from A to Z.
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P
as the first character in the tire size means a
passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards
set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association.
5-49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat
page 5-52.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the
tire pressing outward on each square inch of the
tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: The weight of a motor vehicle with
standard and optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant,
but without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined
weight of optional accessories. Some examples of
optional accessories are, automatic transmission,
power steering, power brakes, power windows,
power seats, and air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall
of a tire signifying that the tire is in compliance
with the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)
motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT code
includes the Tire Identification Number (TIN), an
alphanumeric designator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant, brand, and date
of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height
to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is
located between the plies and the tread. Cords
may be made from steel or other reinforcing
materials.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. See
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for
page 4-22.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies
are laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees
to the centerline of the tread.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear
5-50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward
when mounted on a vehicle.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating
positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that
faces outward when mounted on a vehicle.
The side of the tire that contains a whitewall,
bears white lettering, or bears manufacturer,
brand, and/or model name molding that is higher
or deeper than the same moldings on the other
sidewall of the tire.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger
vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from
1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying
capacity of a tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on
passenger cars and some light duty trucks and
multipurpose vehicles.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated.
The maximum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure
as shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-22.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire
at the maximum permissible inflation pressure
for that tire.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the
ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at
90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacity
weight, and production options weight.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of
occupants a vehicle is designed to seat multiplied
by 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-22.
the tire beads are seated.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread
and the bead.
5-51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a
tire can operate.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on
an individual tire due to curb weight, accessory
weight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached
to a vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight
and the original equipment tire size and
recommended inflation pressure. See “Tire and
Loading Information Label” under Loading Your
road surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into
contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of
a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires
on page 5-59.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to
operate effectively.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards): A tire information system that
provides consumers with ratings for a tire’s
traction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings
are determined by tire manufacturers using
government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right.
It is not. If your tires do not have enough air
(under-inflation), you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
• Too much heat
• Tire overloading
• Premature or irregular wear
• Poor handling
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of
designated seating positions multiplied by
150 lbs (68 kg) plus the rated cargo load.
• Reduced fuel economy
5-52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
How to Check
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires
may look properly inflated even when they are
under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle
has been sitting for at least three hours or driven
no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Needless damage from road hazards
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information
label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows
your vehicle’s original equipment tires and the
correct inflation pressures for your tires when they
are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation
pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.
Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to
get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire
inflation pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the Tire and Loading Information
label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the
inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
your vehicle’s maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much
weight your vehicle can carry, and an example of
the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loading
vehicle affects vehicle handling and ride comfort.
Never load your vehicle with more weight than it
was designed to carry.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on
the metal stem in the center of the tire valve.
Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more.
5-53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire Pressure Monitor System
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in
your vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings
to a receiver located in the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash
for approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the
malfunction exists.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur
for a variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one
or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the
TPMS to continue to function properly.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one
or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
additional information.
5-54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
Tire Pressure Monitor Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) is designed
to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition
exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and
wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air
pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmit the tire
pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle.
When a low tire pressure
condition is detected, the
TPMS illuminates the low
tire pressure warning light
on the instrument panel
cluster.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The TPMS operates on a radio frequency and complies
with RSS-210 of Industry and Science Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
At the same time a message to check the pressure
in a specific tire appears on the Driver Information Center
(DIC) display. The low tire pressure warning light and the
DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle
until the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
5-55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the DIC, tire pressure levels can be viewed by the
driver. For additional information and details about the
DIC operation and displays see DIC Operation and
on page 3-50.
TPMS Malfunction Light and Message
The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of
the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the
system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light
flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the
remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message
is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC
warning message come on at each ignition cycle until
the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that
can cause the malfunction light to come on are:
The low tire pressure warning light may come on in
cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then
turn off as you start to drive. This may be an early
indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to
your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle’s original
equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your
vehicle’s tires when they are cold. See Loading Your
Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle.
• The TPMS sensor matching process was started but
not completed or not completed successfully after
rotating the vehicle’s tires. The TPMS malfunction
light should go off once the TPMS sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See “TPMS
Sensor Matching Process” later in this section.
• One or more TPMS sensors are missing or
damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS
malfunction light should go off when the TPMS
sensors are installed and the sensor matching
process is performed successfully. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
Your vehicle’s TPMS system can warn you about a low
tire pressure condition but it does not replace normal
tire maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
Notice: Using non-approved tire sealants could
damage the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
sensors. TPMS sensor damage caused by using
an incorrect tire sealant is not covered by the
vehicle warranty. Always use the GM approved
tire sealant available through your dealer/retailer.
• Replacement tires or wheels do not match your
vehicle’s original equipment tires or wheels. Tires
and wheels other than those recommended for your
vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning
5-56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You have two minutes to match each tire and wheel
position. If it takes longer than two minutes to match
any tire and wheel position, the matching process stops
and you will need to start over.
• Operating electronic devices or being near facilities
using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS
could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction.
If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or
signal a low tire condition. See your dealer/retailer for
service if the TPMS malfunction light and DIC message
comes on and stays on.
The TPMS matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the
engine off.
TPMS Sensor Matching Process
3. Press and hold the RKE transmitter’s lock
and unlock buttons at the same time, for about
three seconds. The horn sounds twice to indicate
the receiver is ready for the sensor matching process
to begin. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message
displays on the DIC screen.
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you replace one or more of the TPMS sensors
or rotate the vehicle’s tires, the identification codes
will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position.
The sensors are matched, to the tire/wheel positions,
in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger
side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver
side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your
dealer/retailer for service.
4. Start with the driver side front tire. The driver side
turn signal lamp comes on.
5. Remove the valve cap from the tire’s valve stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for five seconds,
or until a horn chirp sounds. The horn chirp,
which may take up to 30 seconds to sound,
confirms that the sensor identification code
has been matched to the tire/wheel position.
The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each
tire/wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s
air pressure. When increasing the tire’s pressure, do
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure indicated on
the tire’s sidewall. To decrease the tire’s air-pressure
use the pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage, or a key.
6. Proceed to the passenger side front tire.
The passenger side front turn signal lamp
comes on. Repeat the procedure in Step 5.
5-57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. Proceed to the passenger side rear tire.
The passenger side rear turn signal lamp
comes on. Repeat the procedure in Step 5.
The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve
a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will
ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most
like it did when the tires were new.
8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire. The driver
side rear turn signal lamp comes on. Repeat the
procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to
indicate the sensor identification code has been
matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS
sensor matching process is no longer active. The
TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC
display screen goes off.
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment.
Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When
9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems.
Tire Inspection and Rotation
We recommend that you regularly inspect your
vehicle’s tires for signs of wear or damage.
for more information.
When rotating the vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label. See Inflation - Tire
on page 4-22.
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km). See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor System. See Tire
When It Is Time for New Tires
Various factors, such as maintenance, temperatures,
driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions
influence when you need new tires.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly
tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under
Capacities and Specifications.
One way to tell when it
is time for new tires is to
check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of tread
remaining.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
5-59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You need new tires if any of the following statements
are true:
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that
cannot be repaired well because of the size or
location of the damage.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall near the tire
size. If the tires have an all-season tread design, the TPC
spec number will be followed by a MS, for mud and snow.
information.
The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are
not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if
your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast
this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading
conditions, and inflation pressure maintenance. With
proper care and maintenance tires will typically wear
out before they degrade due to age. If you are unsure
about the need to replace your tires as they get
older, consult the tire manufacturer for more information.
GM recommends replacing tires in sets of four. This is
because uniform tread depth on all tires will help keep
your vehicle performing most like it did when the tires
were new. Replacing less than a full set of tires can affect
the braking and handling performance of your vehicle.
information on proper tire rotation.
5-60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those that
do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure they are the
same size, load range, speed rating, and construction
type (radial and bias-belted tires) as your vehicle’s
original tires.
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose
control while driving. If you mix tires of
different sizes, brands, or types (radial
and bias-belted tires) the vehicle may
not handle properly, and you could have
a crash. Using tires of different sizes,
brands, or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the correct
size, brand, and type of tires on your
vehicle’s wheels.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
could give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if
non-TPC Spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle.
Non-TPC Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure
warning that is higher or lower than the proper warning
level you would get with TPC Spec rated tires.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See Loading
the Tire and Loading Information label and its location
on your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,
the wheel rim flanges could develop
cracks after many miles of driving. A tire
and/or wheel could fail suddenly, causing
a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the
wheels on your vehicle.
5-61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may
affect the way your vehicle performs, including its
braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability,
and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle
has electronic systems such as, anti-lock brakes,
rollover airbags, traction control, and stability control,
the performance of these systems can be affected.
Quality grades can be found where applicable
on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder
and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA
Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which
grades tires by treadwear, traction, and
{CAUTION:
temperature performance. This applies only to
vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are
molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car
tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable
level of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use Saturn
specific wheel and tire systems developed for
your vehicle, and have them properly installed
by a Saturn certified technician.
10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to some
limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors
passenger cars and light trucks may vary with
respect to these grades, they must also conform
to federal safety requirements and additional
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria (TPC)
standards.
5-62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Treadwear
Temperature – A, B, C
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
government test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and a half (1.5) times as well
on the government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices, and differences
in road characteristics and climate.
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s
ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that is properly
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
5-63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
{CAUTION:
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment might need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, the tires
and wheels might need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer/retailer for proper diagnosis.
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts, and wheel nuts for replacement.
Wheel Replacement
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts,
or wheel nuts, replace them only with new Saturn
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, and wheel nuts
for your vehicle.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badly rusted
or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose, the wheel,
wheel bolts, and wheel nuts should be replaced. If the
wheel leaks air, replace it (except some aluminum
wheels, which can sometimes be repaired). See your
dealer/retailer if any of these conditions exist.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire clearance to
the body and chassis.
Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel
you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become
loose and even come off. This could lead to a
crash. Be sure to use the correct wheel nuts.
If you have to replace them, be sure to get new
Saturn original equipment wheel nuts.
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel
could come off and cause a crash. When
you change a wheel, remove any rust or
dirt from places where the wheel attaches
to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can
use a cloth or a paper towel to do this;
but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush
later, if you need to, to get all the rust or
dirt off.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can lead
to brake pulsation and rotor damage. To avoid
expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten the wheel
nuts in the proper sequence and to the proper
torque specification.
{CAUTION:
Never use oil or grease on studs or the
threads of the wheel nuts. If you do, the wheel
nuts might come loose and the wheel could
fall off, causing a crash.
5-65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Used Replacement Wheels
CAUTION: (Continued)
{CAUTION:
cause damage to the brakes, suspension or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle and you or others may be injured
in a crash.
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could fail
suddenly and cause a crash. If you have to
replace a wheel, use a new Saturn original
equipment wheel.
Use another type of traction device only if its
manufacturer recommends it for use on the
vehicle and tire size combination and road
conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to the
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting the vehicle, and do
not spin the vehicle’s wheels. If you do find
traction devices that will fit, install them on
the front tires.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
Do not use tire chains. There is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
without the proper amount of clearance can
CAUTION: (Continued)
5-66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place and stopping.
Then do this:
If a Tire Goes Flat
Your vehicle has a tire sealant and compressor kit.
There is no spare tire, no tire changing equipment,
and no place to store a tire.
2. Park your vehicle. Set the parking brake firmly and
put the shift lever in PARK (P). See Shifting Into
It is unusual for a tire to blow out while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your tires properly. See Tires
on page 5-47. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more
likely to leak out slowly. But, if you should ever have a
blow out, here are a few tips about what to expect and
what to do:
3. Turn off the engine.
4. Inspect the flat tire.
If the tire has been separated from the wheel, has
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off
the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
damaged sidewalls, or has a puncture larger than a
1
⁄
4
inch (6 mm), the tire is too severely damaged for
the tire sealant and compressor kit to be effective.
1
If the tire has a puncture less than a ⁄4 inch (6 mm)
A rear blow out, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would use
in a skid. In any rear blow out, remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control by
steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may be
very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
in the tread area of the tire, see Tire Sealant and
5-67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Your vehicle is equipped with a tire sealant and
compressor kit that is capable of temporarily sealing a
puncture up to a 1⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the
tire. There is no jack of spare tire. The kit inflates with
liquid sealant and air. The tire sealant and compressor
kit can also be used to inflate an underinflated tire. After
the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, see
be driven for five miles to distribute the sealant in the
tire and seal the puncture. See “Using the Tire Sealant
and Compressor Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire” later in this section.
After temporarily repairing a tire using the tire sealant
and compressor kit, take your vehicle to an authorized
dealer/retailer as soon as possible. If the sealant is
within 100 miles (161 kilometers) of driving, then it is
easier to clean from the tire and you are less likely
to require a replacement tire.
A. Air Compressor
B. Tire Sealant Canister E. Air Pressure Gage
D. On/Off Switch
C. Air Compressor
Accessory Plug
F. Air Only Hose
G. Sealant/Air Hose
5-68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Accessing the Tire Sealant and
Compressor Kit
To access the tire sealant and compressor kit:
3. Remove the forward floor panel of the load floor
cargo organizer and place it in the vehicle while you
are removing the tire sealant and compressor kit.
information
2. Lift the forward floor panel of the load floor cargo
organizer.
5-69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Open the floor cargo organizer locks, located on
the top left and right corners of the organizer,
by pushing inward on them.
6. Remove the foam retainer bolt (B) holding down the
foam container.
7. Remove the foam container (C).
5. Remove the load floor cargo organizer.
8. Remove the sealant and compressor kit (A) from its
foam container.
5-70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tire Sealant
Read and follow the safe handling instructions on the
instructional label adhered to the sealant canister.
Using the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit to Temporarily Seal and Inflate a
Punctured Tire
Check the tire sealant expiration date on the sealant
canister. The sealant canister should be replaced before
its expiration date. Replacement canisters are available
at your local dealer/retailer. See “Removal and
Follow the directions closely for correct sealant usage.
Installation of Sealant Canister” later in this section.
The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture up to
1
⁄4
inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire. The sealant
cannot seal sidewall damage, large punctures, or a tire
that has become unseated from the wheel. See Roadside
The sealant can only be used to seal one tire.
After usage, the tire sealant canister and sealant/air
hose assembly must be replaced at a dealer/retailer.
See “Removal and Installation of Sealant Canister”
later in this section.
2. Inspect the punctured tire.
The sealant can temporarily seal a puncture up
1
to ⁄4 inch (6 mm) in the tread area of the tire.
5-71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The sealant cannot seal sidewall damage, large
punctures, or a tire that has become unseated from
page 7-6.
{CAUTION:
Do not remove any objects that have penetrated
the tire.
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
3. Place the tire sealant and compressor kit on the
ground and unwrap the sealant/air hose (G) from
the side of the compressor.
4. Remove the valve stem cap from the flat tire by
turning it counterclockwise.
(Automatic Engine Start/Stop) on page 2-18
for more information. The vehicle must be
running while using the air compressor.
5. Attach the sealant/air hose (G) onto the tire valve
stem. Turn it clockwise until it is tight.
Make sure the sealant and compressor kit on/off
switch (D) is in the O (off) position.
{CAUTION:
6. Remove the air compressor accessory plug (C)
from the unit.
Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture,
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read the inflator instructions, and inflate the
tire to its recommended pressure. Do not
exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
7. Plug the air compressor accessory plug (C) into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
Do not slam door or close window on the
compressor accessory plug cord.
5-72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Push the On/Off switch (D) to the I (on) position.
11. Turn the compressor off by pushing the On/Off
switch (D) to the O (off) position.
The tire sealant and compressor kit will inject
sealant and air into the tire.
Steps 12 through 20 must be done immediately
after Step 11.
The pressure gage (E) will initially show a high
pressure while the compressor pushes the sealant
into the tire. Once the sealant is completely
dispersed into the tire, the pressure will quickly drop
and start to rise again as the tire inflates with air only.
The tire is not sealed and will continue to leak
air until the vehicle is driven and the sealant
is distributed in the tire.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as they could be hot after usage.
10. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage (E) on the top
of the unit. The recommended inflation pressure
can be found on the Tire and Loading Information
12. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug (C) from
the accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
13. Disconnect the sealant/air hose (G) from the tire
valve stem by turning it counterclockwise and
replace the tire valve stem cap.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the
compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get
an accurate reading. The compressor may be turned
on and off until the correct pressure is reached.
14. Wrap the sealant/air hose (G) around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug (C) back
in the air compressor. To do this, wrap the air
compressor accessory plug, snap in the plug, and
then push in the bottom and then the top of the
wrapped air compressor accessory plug.
Notice: If the recommended pressure cannot be
reached after 15 minutes, the vehicle should not
be driven farther. Damage to the tire is severe and
the sealant will not be effective. Remove the air
compressor plug from the accessory power outlet
and unscrew the inflating hose from the tire
page 7-6 for more information.
5-73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16. If the flat tire was
able to inflate to the
recommended inflation
pressure, remove
{CAUTION:
the maximum speed
label from the sealant
canister (B).
Storing the tire sealant and compressor
kit or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in its original location.
18. Return the equipment to its original storage location
in your vehicle.
17. Place it in a highly visible location such as the
inside of the upper left corner of the windshield
or to the face of the radio/clock.
19. Immediately drive the vehicle 5 miles (8 km) to
distribute the sealant evenly in the tire.
The maximum speed label reminds you to drive
cautiously and not to exceed 55 mph (90 km/h) until
you have the damaged tire inspected and repaired.
5-74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20. Stop at a safe location and check the tire pressure,
refer to Steps 1 through 8 under “Using the Tire
Sealant and Compressor Kit without Sealant
to Inflate an Underinflated Tire (Not Punctured)”
later in this section.
Using the Air Compressor without
Sealant to Inflate an Underinflated Tire
(Not Punctured)
To use the air compressor to inflate a tire with air only
and not sealant:
If the tire pressure has fallen more then 10 psi
(68 kPa), below the recommended inflation pressure,
stop driving the vehicle. The tire is too severely
damaged and the tire sealant and compressor kit
cannot seal the tire. See Roadside Assistance
If the tire pressure has not dropped more than
10 psi (68 kPa) from the recommended inflation
pressure, you can inflate the tire back up to
the recommended inflation pressure.
21. Wipe off any sealant from the wheel, tire and
vehicle.
22. Dispose of the sealant canister (B) and sealant/air
hose (G) assembly at a local dealer/retailer or in
accordance with your local state codes and
practices.
23. After temporarily sealing a tire with the tire
sealant and compressor kit, take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer/retailer to have the tire
inspected and repaired or replaced.
1. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B) by pulling up on the lever.
2. Pull the air only hose (F) from the sealant
canister (B).
3. Remove the tire valve stem cap by turning it
counterclockwise.
5-75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4. Push the air only hose (F) onto the tire valve stem
and push the lever down to secure in place.
{CAUTION:
5. Remove the air compressor accessory plug (C)
from the unit.
Overinflation could cause the tire to rupture,
and you or others could be injured. Be sure to
read the inflator instructions, and inflate the
tire to its recommended pressure. Do not
exceed 36 psi (248 kPa).
6. Plug the air compressor accessory plug into an
accessory power outlet in the vehicle. See Accessory
Do not slam the door or close the window on the
compressor accessory plug cord.
8. Push the On/Off switch (D) to the I (on) position.
{CAUTION:
The tire sealant and compressor kit will inflate the
tire with air only.
Idling the engine in a closed-in place or with
the climate control system off can cause
deadly carbon monoxide (CO). See Engine
9. Inflate the tire to the recommended inflation
pressure using the air pressure gage (E) on the
top of the unit. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-52.
The pressure gage reading is slightly high while the
compressor is on. Turn the compressor off to get
an accurate pressure reading. The compressor may
be turned on and off until the correct pressure is
reached.
The vehicle must be running while using the
air compressor.
10. Turn off the air compressor by pushing the On/Off
switch (D) to the O (off) position.
Be careful while handling the tire sealant and
compressor kit as they could be hot after usage.
5-76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
11. Unplug the air compressor accessory plug from the
accessory power outlet in the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
12. Unlock the air only hose (F) from the tire valve stem
by pulling the lever up.
Storing the tire sealant and compressor
kit or other equipment in the passenger
compartment of the vehicle could cause injury.
In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment
could strike someone. Store the tire sealant
and compressor kit in its original location.
13. Disconnect the air only hose (F) from the tire valve
stem and replace the tire valve stem cap.
14. Wrap the air only hose (F) around the side of the
air compressor channel to stow it back in its
original location.
15. Stow the air compressor accessory plug back in the
air compressor. To do this, wrap the air compressor
accessory plug, snap in the plug, and then push
in the bottom and then the top of the wrapped
air compressor accessory plug.
16. Return the equipment to its original storage location
of your vehicle.
5-77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Removal and Installation of the Sealant
Canister
To remove the sealant canister, do the following:
3. Turn the sealant canister so the inflator filling hose
is aligned with the slot in the compressor.
1. Unlock the air only hose from the sealant canister
by pulling the lever up.
4. Lift the sealant canister from the compressor and
replace with a new sealant canister. See your
dealer/retailer for more information.
2. Unwrap the sealant/air hose from the compressor.
5-78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To install a new sealant canister, do the following:
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
1. Align the sealant/air hose with the slot in the air
compressor.
2. Push the sealant canister down and turn it
clockwise.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
3. Wrap the sealant/air hose around the air
compressor channel to stow it in its original location.
4. Push the air only hose onto the sealant canister inlet
and push the lever down.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
Appearance Care
Interior Cleaning
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if it is
cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt
can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt can damage
carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces. Regular
vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from
your upholstery. It is important to keep your upholstery
from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should
be removed as quickly as possible. Your vehicle’s interior
may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains
to set rapidly.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
5-79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Your dealer/retailer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your dealer/retailer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as
much of the soil as possible using one of the following
techniques:
Do not clean your vehicle using:
• A knife or any other sharp object to remove a soil
from any interior surface.
• A stiff brush. It can cause damage to your vehicle’s
interior surfaces.
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• Heavy pressure or aggressive rubbing with a
cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure can damage
your interior and does not improve the effectiveness
of soil removal.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
• Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with
degreasers can leave residue that streaks and
attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops
per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.
Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps.
To clean:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or
club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
• Too much cleaner that saturates the upholstery.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
• Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that
can damage your vehicle’s interior.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner
or spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a small
hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally cleaned
area gives any impression that a ring formation may
result, clean the entire surface.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on
your instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make it
difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot
lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial
cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and
protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change
the appearance and feel of your interior and are not
recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to
clean your vehicle’s interior because they can alter
the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner.
5-81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
directions regarding correct product usage, necessary
safety precautions and appropriate disposal of any
vehicle care product.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
Rinse the vehicle well, before washing and after to
remove all cleaning agents completely. If they are
allowed to dry on the surface, they could stain.
Washing Your Vehicle
The best way to preserve your vehicle’s finish is to keep
it clean by washing it often.
Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or an all-cotton
towel to avoid surface scratches and water spotting
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter the
vehicle. Avoid using high pressure washes closer than
12 inches (30 cm) to the surface of the vehicle. Use of
power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa) can
result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can
damage the emblems or nameplates on your vehicle.
Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it
should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on
your vehicle or damage may occur and it would not
be covered by the warranty.
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car
washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are
petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as
they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on your
vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
page 5-82.
5-82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get approved cleaning products
from your dealer/retailer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If your vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating of
wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for all
bright metal parts.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish
may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can
damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted
surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If
necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked
safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter.
5-83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Windshield and Wiper Blades
Aluminum Wheels
Clean the outside of the windshield with glass cleaner.
Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may
be damaged if you do not wash your vehicle after
driving on roads that have been sprayed with
magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These
chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as
ice and dust. Always wash your vehicle’s chrome
with soap and water after exposure.
Clean the rubber blades using a lint free cloth or
paper towel soaked with windshield washer fluid or
a mild detergent. Wash the windshield thoroughly when
cleaning the blades. Bugs, road grime, sap, and a
buildup of vehicle wash/wax treatments may cause
wiper streaking. Replace the wiper blades if they are
worn or damaged.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only approved cleaners on
aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
Wipers can be damaged by:
• Extreme dusty conditions
• Sand and salt
• Heat and sun
• Snow and ice, without proper removal
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
5-84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of the vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because the surface could be damaged.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the
corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up
materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger
areas of finish damage can be corrected in your
dealer’s/retailer’s body and paint shop.
Tires
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
5-85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underbody Maintenance
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are
not removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer/retailer or an underbody car washing
system can do this for you.
Chrome Cleaner and
Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall Tire
Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Glass Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke, and fingerprints.
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create a
chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on your vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Chrome and Wire Wheel
Cleaner
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
wipe off.
Finish Enhancer
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, we
will repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces
of new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Description
Usage
Vehicle Identification
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Swirl Remover Polish
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Cleaner Wax
Cleans, shines, and
protects tires. No wiping
necessary.
Foaming Tire Shine Low
Gloss
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Wash Wax Concentrate
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield
from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on
the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and
the certificates of title and registration.
Removes spots and stains
from carpets, vinyl, and
cloth upholstery.
Spot Lifter
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather, and carpet.
Engine Identification
Odor Eliminator
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This
code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications,
and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications”
for your vehicle’s engine code.
5-87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Service Parts Identification Label
Electrical System
This label is on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
The label has the following information:
Intermediate Voltage Devices and
Wiring
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Model designation
{CAUTION:
• Paint information
• Production options and special equipment
Do not remove this label from the vehicle.
Exposure to intermediate voltage can cause
shock and burns. The intermediate voltage
systems in your vehicle can only be serviced
by technicians with special training.
Intermediate voltage devices are identified by
labels. Do not remove, open, take apart, or
modify these devices. Intermediate voltage
cable or wiring has blue covering. Do not
probe, tamper with, cut, or modify intermediate
voltage cable or wiring.
5-88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by a circuit
breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy
snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools.
If the overload is caused by some electrical problem,
have it fixed.
Notice: Do not add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer
first. Some electrical equipment can damage
your vehicle and the damage would not be covered
by your warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment
can keep other components from working as they
should.
Power Windows and Other Power
Options
Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery, even
if your vehicle is not operating.
Circuit breakers in the fuse block protect the power
windows and other power accessories. When the current
load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,
protecting the circuit until the problem is fixed or
goes away.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to
add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
5-89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by fuses. This greatly reduces the chance
of circuit overload and fire caused by electrical
problems.
The instrument panel fuse block is located on the
passenger side of the lower console.
There are three fuse blocks - the main underhood fuse
block, the auxiliary hybrid underhood fuse block and
the instrument panel fuse block.
To identify and check fuses and relays, refer to the
Fuse Usage Chart on the inside surface of the
fuse panel door.
Pull the latch of the fuse box cover straight back to
access the fuses.
5-90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
DRIV P/WIN Driver Side Power Window
S/ROOF Sunroof Module
Usage
PWR SEAT Power Seat
PASS P/WIN Passenger Side Power Window
5-91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Cigarette Lighter
Fuses
Usage
CIGAR
BCM (VB6) Body Control Module (VB6)
BCM (VB4) Body Control Module (VB4)
BCM (VB5) Body Control Module (VB5)
Engine Control Module (ECM)/
Transmission Control Module (TCM)
ECM/TCM
FSCM
ISRVM
Fuel Storage Control Module
Inner Side Rearview Mirror)
Instrument Panel Cluster
Airbag System
TRL
Trailer
AIRCON
AUDIO
Air Conditioner
Audio
Cluster
AIR BAG
OSRVM
KEY CAP
WHL S/W
F/DR LCK
APO2
BCM (VB7) Body Control Module (VB7)
Outer Side Rearview Mirror
Key Capture Solenoid
Steering Wheel Switch
Front Driver Door Lock
Accessory Power Outlet 2
IGN SW
AIR BAG
WASHER
APO1
Ignition Switch
Air Bag System
Washer Pump
Accessory Power Outlet 1
Fuel Storage Control Module
Rear Closure
FSCM
BCM (VB3) Body Control Module (BCM) (VB3)
DR LCK Door Lock
RR CLR
5-92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Underhood Fuse Block
Fuses
BCM (VB2) Body Control Module (VB2)
DRL Daytime Running Light
BCM (VB1) Body Control Module (VB1)
Usage
Main Underhood Fuse Block
The main underhood fuse block is located on the driver
side of the engine compartment. The main underhood
fuse block is the larger of the two fuse blocks in the
engine compartment. Remove the fuse block cover for
access to the fuses and relays. See Engine Compartment
location. To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse
between your thumb and index finger and pull straight
out or use the fuse puller located inside the fuse block.
ONSTAR
OnStar®
Relays
Usage
RELAY
ACC/RAP
Accessory, Retained Accessory
Power (RAP) Relay
Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components
on your vehicle may damage it. Always keep the
covers on any electrical component.
RELAY
RUN/CRANK
Run/Crank Relay
5-93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
ENG 1
ENG 2
Usage
Fuses
ECM
Usage
Engine Control Module
Engine 3
Engine 1
Engine 2
ENG 3
5-94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fuses
Usage
Fuses
Usage
A/C COMP
Air Conditioning Compressor
HDLP LO LH Left Headlamp Low-Beam
HDLP LO RH Right Headlamp Low-Beam
Engine Control Module/CAM,
Emissions, Injectors,
Electronic Throttle Control
MAIN
PKLP LH
FRT FOG
H/L HI
Left Parking Lamp
Front Fog Lamps
H/L High
FUEL
AWD
Fuel Pump
Not Used
BLANK
Not Used
Anti-lock Brake System
Module (ABS)
ABS
HDLP
WASHER
Headlamp Washer
STOP
Stoplamp
TCM
Transmission Control Module
HEATING MAT Heating Mat
T/PKLP L H Left Turn Signal and Parking Lamp
HORN
Horn
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
WIPER
Windshield Wiper
SUNROOF* Sunroof (Option)
ANTI-THEFT* Theft Deterrent System (Option)
POWER
Power Seat (Option)
SEAT*
5-95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Relays
Usage
Relays
Usage
FAN AUX
RELAY
FAN
CONTROL
RELAY
Cooling Fan Auxiliary Relay
Cooling Fan Control Relay
FUEL RELAY Fuel Pump Relay
RUN RELAY Run Relay
PARK LP
WIPER SPEED
Windshield Wiper Speed Relay
RELAY
Parking Lamp Relay
RELAY
DEFOG
RELAY
Defogger Relay
STARTER
RELAY
Starter Relay
HI/LO RELAY High/Low Relay
A/C COMP
RELAY
H/L WASHER
Washer Relay
RELAY
Air Conditioning Compressor Relay
HORN RELAY Horn Relay
Engine Control Module/CAM,
MAIN RELAY Emissions, Injectors, Electronic
Throttle Control Relay
WIPER RELAY Windshield Wiper Relay
FRT FOG
Front Fog Lamp Relay
RELAY
FAN MAIN
Cooling Fan Main Relay
RELAY
H/L HI RELAY H/L High Relay
5-96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Hybrid Underhood Fuse Block
Fuses
Usage
HYBRID
PUMPS
The Hybrid Underhood Fuse Block is located on the
passenger side of the engine compartment. It is the
smaller of the two fuse blocks in the engine compartment.
Hybrid Pumps
HILL HOLD
VLVS
Hill Hold Valves
AUX
TRANSPUMP
Auxiliary Transmission Pump
Relays
Usage
HILL HOLD
VLVS
Hill Hold Valves
AUX
TRANSPUMP
Auxiliary Transmission Pump
5-97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Capacities and Specifications
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge
amount, see the refrigerant caution label located
under the hood. See your retailer for more
information.
Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a
Cooling System
9.5 qt
5.0 qt
9.0 L
4.7 L
Engine Oil with Filter
Fuel Tank
18.0 gal
6.9 qt
68.1 L
6.5 L
Transmission (Bottom Pan Removal)
Wheel Nut Torque
100 ft lb
140 Y
All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this
manual. Recheck fluid level after filling.
Engine Specifications
Engine
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
2.4L L4
Z
Automatic
0.040 inches (1.01 mm)
5-98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule
We want to help you keep your vehicle in good working
condition. But we do not know exactly how you will
drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few
times a week. Or you might drive long distances all
the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to
work, to do errands, or in many other ways.
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your dealer/retailer.
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance might not be covered
by warranty.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the Tire and
Loading Information label. See Loading Your
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep your
vehicle in good working condition, but also helps the
environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level of
emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
on page 5-6.
6-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
When you go to your dealer/retailer for your service
needs, you will know that trained and supported service
technicians will perform the work using genuine parts.
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
should be checked, when to check it, and what you
can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can
be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs, you
can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your dealer/retailer to have a qualified
technician do the work. See Doing Your Own
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13. When your vehicle is serviced, make sure
these are used. All parts should be replaced and all
necessary repairs done before you or anyone else
drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine
parts from your dealer/retailer.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So,
unless you are technically qualified and have the
necessary equipment, you should have your
dealer/retailer do these jobs.
6-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Change Engine Oil light appears, certain
services, checks, and inspections are required. Required
services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally, it is
recommended that your first service be Maintenance I,
your second service be Maintenance II, and that you
alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II thereafter.
However, in some cases, Maintenance II may be
required more often.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the Change Engine Oil light comes on, it means
that service is required for your vehicle. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next 600
miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over
a year. However, your engine oil and filter must be
changed at least once a year and at this time the system
must be reset. Your dealer/retailer has trained service
technicians who will perform this work using genuine
parts and reset the system.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the Change
Engine Oil light comes on within 10 months since
the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the light comes on 10 months
or more since the last service or if the light has not
come on at all for one year.
6-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I Maintenance II
Service.
•
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter. If necessary, replace filter. See Engine
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and
add fluid as needed.
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required
Services” in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
Replace passenger compartment air filter. See footnote (k).
Inspect throttle system. See footnote (g).
6-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles
(kilometers) shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
50,000
75,000
100,000
125,000
150,000
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
(40 000)
(80 000) (120 000) (160 000) (200 000) (240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose or
damaged components.
Replace engine air cleaner filter. See
Change automatic transmission fluid
(severe service). See footnote (h).
Change automatic transmission fluid
(normal service).
Replace spark plugs. An Emission
Control Service.
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
6-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and safety
belt assemblies are working properly. Look for any
other loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you
see anything that might keep a safety belt system
from doing its job, have it repaired. Have any torn or
frayed safety belts replaced. Also see Checking
Maintenance Footnotes
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, door hinges and
latches, hood hinges and latches, glove box hinges,
sunroof (if equipped), and any folding seat hardware.
More frequent lubrication may be required when
exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone
grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make
them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts or
signs of wear.
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced if they
are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all pipes,
fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine parts as
needed. To help ensure proper operation, a pressure test
of the cooling system and pressure cap and cleaning the
outside of the radiator and air conditioning condenser is
recommended at least once a year.
(g) Check system for interference or binding and
for damaged or missing parts. Replace parts as needed.
Replace any components that have high effort or
excessive wear.
(d) Inspect wiper blades for wear, cracking, or
contamination. Clean the windshield and wiper blades, if
contaminated. Replace wiper blades that are worn or
page 5-84 for more information.
(h) Severe service is when the vehicle is mainly driven
under one or more of these conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
6-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer/retailer
for what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator,
condenser, pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test
the cooling system and pressure cap.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your dealer/retailer can assist you with these
checks and services.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired and
the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
(k) Or every 12 months, whichever occurs first. If you
drive regularly under dusty conditions, the filter may
require replacement more often.
At Each Fuel Fill
It is important to perform these underhood checks at
each fuel fill.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, or
obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Engine Oil Level Check
Notice: It is important to check the engine oil
regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to
keep the engine oil at the proper level can cause
damage to the engine not covered by your warranty.
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
6-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-20.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the windshield
washer fluid reservoir and add the proper fluid if
necessary.
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
At Least Once a Month
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
Tire Inspection and Inflation Check
Inspect your vehicle’s tires for wear and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. See Inflation -
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to
turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If
the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your
dealer/retailer for service.
6-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON/RUN,
but do not start the engine. Without applying the
regular brake, try to move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) with normal effort. If the shift lever
moves out of PARK (P), contact your dealer/retailer
for service.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn
the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position.
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only
when the shift lever is in PARK (P).
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
• The ignition key should come out only in
LOCK/OFF.
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
on page 2-26.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
6-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism
Check
Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required.
Underbody Flushing Service
{CAUTION:
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care to
clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other debris
can collect.
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle begin
to move.
Tire Sealant and Compressor Kit
Check the sealant expiration date printed on the
instruction label of the Tire Sealant and Compressor
Kit (if equipped) at least once a year. See your
dealer/retailer for a replacement canister.
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake, set the
parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability: With
the engine running and the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle is
held by the parking brake only.
6-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Usage
Automatic
Transmission Transmission Fluid.
Fluid/Lubricant
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part
number, or specification can be obtained from your
dealer/retailer.
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
Key Lock
Cylinders
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Hood Latch
Assembly,
Secondary
Latch, Pivots,
Spring Anchor,
and Release
Pawl
Hood, Liftgate
Door, and Rear
Folding Seat
Hinges
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol. To
determine the proper viscosity for
your vehicle’s engine, see Engine
Engine Oil
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
water and use only DEX-COOL®
page 5-20.
Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol
(Saturn Part No. 21038869 or
GM Part No. U.S. 12346293, in
Canada 992723) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Engine Coolant
Sunroof Track
Hydraulic Brake Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid or
System
Windshield
Washer
equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
Optikleen® Washer Solvent
Weatherstrip Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,
Chassis Lubricant
Weatherstrip in Canada 10953518) or
(GM Part No. 12377985,
in Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,
in Canada 992887).
Parking Brake
Cable Guides
6-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your retailer.
Part
Saturn Part Number
96815102
ACDelco Part Number
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
Engine Oil Filter
—
PF457G
—
12605566
19130294
1258004
Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element
Spark Plugs
41-103
Wiper Blades
Driver’s Side – 24 inches (60.0 cm)
Passenger’s Side – 16 inches (40.0 cm)
Rear – 12.0 inches (30.0 cm)
96830172
96830174
96624648
—
—
—
6-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Engine Drive Belt Routing
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the
date, odometer reading, who performed the service,
and the type of services performed in the boxes
Any additional information from Owner Checks and
record pages. You should retain all maintenance
receipts.
The engine drive belt on this hybrid vehicle is under a
higher tension than the engine drive belt on a non-hybrid
vehicle and requires the use of a special kind of tool
to service. See your dealer/retailer for service.
6-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Odometer
Reading
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Date
Serviced By
Services Performed
6-18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order to
give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have the
following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Assistance and
Information
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This 17-digit
number can be found on the vehicle registration or
title, on the upper driver side corner of the instrument
panel, or on your roadside assistance key card.
• The name of your selling and servicing retail facility.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
• Your daytime and evening phone numbers.
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your
retailer and to Saturn. Together we are committed to
providing our customers with unparalleled service,
before, during, and after the purchase of a Saturn vehicle,
for total customer satisfaction. We call this the Saturn
Difference. Normally, any concerns with the sales
transaction or the operation of the vehicle are resolved by
the retailer’s sales or service departments. If, for any
reason, your ownership experience falls below your
expectations, we suggest you take the following action:
When contacting Saturn, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a retailer’s facility. That
is why we suggest you follow Step One first.
STEP THREE (U.S. Owners): Both Saturn and its
retailers are committed to making sure you are
completely satisfied with your Saturn vehicle. However, if
you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the
procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, Saturn and its
retailers offer the additional assistance of a neutral party
through our voluntary participation in a mediation/
arbitration program called Better Business Bureau (BBB)
Auto Line.
STEP ONE: Contact the Retail Customer Assistance
Liaison. Any member of the retail management team has
the authority and the desire to resolve your concerns.
Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at this level.
STEP TWO: Should you need additional assistance, in
the U.S., contact the Saturn Customer Assistance Center
by calling 1-800-553-6000. In Canada, call the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999. A
Saturn Customer Assistance Center team member will
handle your call and assist in providing product and
warranty information, the nearest retailer location,
roadside assistance, brochures, literature and discuss
any concerns you may have.
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out-of-court program
administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus
to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or
the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
This program is available at no cost to you, our customer.
7-2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Although you may be required to resort to this informal
dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action,
use of the program is free of charge and your case is
generally heard within 40 days. If you do not agree with
the decision given in your case, you can reject it and
proceed with any other venue for relief available to you.
The program provides for the review of the facts involved
by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an
informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is
designed so that the entire dispute settlement process,
from the time you file your complaint to the final decision,
should be completed in approximately 70 days. We
believe our impartial program offers advantages over
courts in most jurisdictions because it is informal, quick,
and free of charge.
Contact the BBB Auto Line Program by using the toll-free
telephone number or by writing them at the following
address:
For further information concerning eligibility in the
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP), call
toll-free 1-800-207-0685. Alternatively, you may call
the Saturn Customer Communication Centre,
1-800-263-1999, or you may write to:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
Mediation/Arbitration Program
c/o Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
Mail Code: CA1-163-005
This program is available in all 50 states and the District
of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage and other factors. Saturn Corporation reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
STEP THREE (Canadian Owners):
Your inquiry should be accompanied by the Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN).
General Motors Participation in the
Mediation/Arbitration Program
In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been
addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps
1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited has
committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes
involving factory-related vehicle service claims.
7-3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Here are a few of the valuable tools and services you
will have access to:
Online Owner Center
(United States only)
− My Showroom: Find and save information on
vehicles and current offers in your area.
This is a resource for your Saturn ownership needs.
− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such as
address and phone number for each of your
preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.
Specific vehicle information can be found in one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
− My Driveway: Receive service reminders and
helpful advice on owning and maintaining
your vehicle.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner manual.
− My Preferences: Manage your profile, subscribe to
E-News and use tools and forms with greater ease.
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
To sign up, visit the My GM Canada section within
www.gmcanada.com.
• Find Saturn retailers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members.
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist owners who have hearing difficulties, Saturn
has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices
for the Deaf) equipment in its Saturn Customer
Assistance Center.
Refer to www.saturn.com on the web for updated
information and to register your vehicle.
My GM Canada (Canada only)
My GM Canada is a password-protected section of
gmcanada.com where you can save information on
GM vehicles, get personalized offers, and use handy
tools and forms with greater ease.
Any hearing or speech-impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or to a conventional Text
Telephone (TTY) can communicate with Saturn by
dialing 1-800-TDD-6000. TTY users in Canada
may dial 1-800-263-3830.
7-4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Offices
Saturn encourages customers to call the toll-free
number for assistance. If a customer wishes to write to
Saturn, the letter should be addressed to:
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Saturn Customer Assistance Center
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Code 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
1-800-553-6000
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 toward eligible aftermarket
driver or passenger adaptive equipment you may
require for your vehicle such as hand controls,
wheelchair/scooter lifts, etc.
1-800-833-6000 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-553-6000
In Canada, write to:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Ltd.
CA1-163-005
The offer is available for a limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.
For more details, or to determine your vehicle’s
eligibility, visit your Saturn retailer or call the Saturn
Customer Assistance Center at 1-800-553-6000.
Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-6000.
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
www.gmcanada.com
1-800-263-1999
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone
devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
In Canada, customers may call the Saturn
Customer Communication Centre at 1-800-263-1999.
TTY users in Canada may call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Lock-Out Service: Lock-out service is covered at
no charge if you are unable to gain entry into your
vehicle. A remote unlock may be available if
you have an active OnStar® subscription. To ensure
security, the driver must present personal
identification before lock-out service is provided. In
Canada, the vehicle registration is also required.
• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway or
Highway: Tow to the nearest Saturn retailer for
warranty service or in the event of a vehicle-disabling
crash. Winch-out assistance is provided when the
vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire in good
condition, when equipped and properly inflated, is
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not covered
by a warrantable failure.
Roadside Assistance Program
For vehicles purchased in the U.S., call 1-800-553-6000;
(Text Telephone (TTY): 1-800-889-2438).
For vehicles purchased in Canada, call 1-800-268-6800.
Service is available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
As the owner of a new Saturn vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the Saturn Roadside
Assistance Program.
Who is Covered?
Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicle
operator, regardless of ownership. In Canada, a person
driving this vehicle without the consent of the owner
is not eligible for coverage.
• Jump Start: A battery jump start is covered at no
Services Provided
charge if the vehicle does not start.
The following services are provided in the U.S. and
Canada up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km),
whichever comes first, and, in Canada only, up
to a maximum of $100.
• Trip Routing Service (Canada Only): Upon
request, Roadside Assistance will send you detailed,
computer personalized maps, highlighting your
choice of either the most direct route or the most
scenic route to your destination, anywhere in North
America, along with helpful travel information
pertaining to your trip.
Please allow three weeks before your planned
departure date. Trip routing requests are limited to
six per calendar year.
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for the
vehicle to get to the nearest service station
(approximately $5 Canada). In Canada, service to
provide diesel may be restricted. For safety reasons,
propane and other alternative fuels are not
provided through this service.
7-6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In many instances, mechanical failures may be covered.
However, any cost for parts and labor for non-warranty
repairs are the responsibility of the driver.
• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance
(Canada Only): In the event of a warranty related
vehicle disablement, while en route and over
250 kilometres from the original point of departure,
you might qualify for trip interruption expense
assistance. This assistance covers reasonable
reimbursement of up to a maximum of $500
(Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of $50/day), (B)
lodging (maximum of $100/night), and (C) alternate
ground transportation (maximum of $40/day). This
benefit is to assist you with some of the unplanned
expense you may incur while waiting for your vehicle
to be repaired.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to limit services or reimbursement to an
owner or driver when, in their sole discretion, the claims
become excessive in frequency or type of occurrence.
Calling for Assistance
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling, please
provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representatives:
• Your name, home address, and home telephone
number
Pre-authorization, original detailed receipts, and a
copy of the repair order are required.
Once authorization has been given, your advisor will
help you make any necessary arrangements and
explain how to claim for trip interruption expense
assistance.
• Telephone number of your location
• Location of the vehicle
• Model, year, color, and license plate number of the
vehicle
• Alternative Service (Canada Only): There could be
times when Roadside Assistance cannot provide
timely assistance. Your advisor may authorize you to
secure local emergency road service, and you will be
reimbursed up to $100 upon submission of the
original receipt to Roadside Assistance.
• Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) and delivery date of the vehicle
• Description of the problem
7-7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
If the dealer/retailer requests that you simply drop the
vehicle off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same day repair.
Towing and Road Service Exclusions
Specifically excluded from Roadside Assistance
coverage are towing or services for vehicles operated on
a non-public roadway or highway, fines, impound towing
caused by a violation of local, Municipal, State, Provincial
or Federal law, and mounting, dismounting or changing of
snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating retailers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for vehicles
with the Bumper to Bumper (Base Warranty Coverage
period in Canada) and extended powertrain warranty
in both the U.S. and Canada.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Saturn and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve
the right to make any changes or discontinue the
Roadside Assistance program at any time without
notification.
Several courtesy transportation options are available to
assist in reducing your inconvenience when warranty
repairs are required.
Scheduling Service Appointments
Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. A separate booklet entitled “Warranty
and Owner Assistance Information” furnished with
each new vehicle provides detailed warranty coverage
information.
When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact
your dealer/retailer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising your
service consultant of your transportation needs, your
dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience.
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is
safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
7-8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Transportation Options
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, Saturn helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your retailer can offer you one of the following:
Your retailer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for an overnight
warranty repair. Rental reimbursement will be limited
and must be supported by original receipts. This
requires that you sign and complete a rental agreement
and meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and may
include minimum age requirements, insurance coverage,
credit card, etc. You are responsible for fuel usage
charges and may also be responsible for taxes, levies,
usage fees, excessive mileage, or rental usage
beyond the completion of the repair.
Shuttle Service
Shuttle service is the preferred means of offering
Courtesy Transportation. Retailers may provide you with
shuttle service to get you to your destination with
minimal interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service within reasonable
time and distance parameters of the retailer’s area.
It may not be possible to provide a like-vehicle as a
courtesy rental.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
Additional Program Information
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and
public transportation is used instead of the retailer’s
shuttle service, the expense must be supported
by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum
amount allowed by Saturn for shuttle service. In
addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange
transportation through a friend or relative, limited
reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be
available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and
be supported by original receipts. See your retailer for
information regarding the allowance amounts for
reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs.
All program options, such as shuttle service, may not be
available at every retailer. Please contact your retailer
for specific information about availability. All Courtesy
Transportation arrangements will be administered
by appropriate retailer personnel.
Saturn reserves the right to unilaterally modify, change
or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at any time
and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility pursuant
to the terms and conditions described herein at its
sole discretion.
7-9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Repair Facility
Collision Parts
We recommend that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your dealer/retailer may have a
collision repair center with GM-trained technicians and
state of the art equipment, or be able to recommend
a collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the
same materials and construction methods as the parts
with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM
Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your
vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are
preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help
maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.
Insuring Your Vehicle
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There
are significant differences in the quality of coverage
afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many
insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM
vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by
using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance
companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases,
the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections
of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM
part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
7-10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you
assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original
equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is
not available from your current insurance carrier,
consider switching to another insurance carrier.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from
the tow truck operator or write down the driver’s
name, the service’s name, and the phone number.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts. Read
your lease carefully, as you may be charged at the
end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these
items in your vehicle.
If a Crash Occurs
Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash.
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company
and policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are
uninjured, make sure that no one else in your
vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call emergency services
for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all
matters have been taken care of. Move your
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the crash. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for
a police report, phone or go to the police
department headquarters the next day and you can
get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In
some states/provinces with “no fault” insurance
laws, a report may not be necessary. This is
especially true if there are no injuries and both
vehicles are driveable.
vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you
are instructed to move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the crash.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental
frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash.
This will help guard against post-crash legal action.
7-11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live
with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your
insurance company may initially value the repair using
aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts.
Remember if your vehicle is leased you may be
obligated to have the vehicle repaired with Genuine GM
parts, even if your insurance coverage does not pay
the full cost.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a dealer/retailer or a
private collision repair facility to fix the damage,
make sure you are comfortable with them.
Remember, you will have to feel comfortable with
their work for a long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for the
repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits with
that company. In such cases, you can have control of
the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays within
reasonable limits.
Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair
Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your
GM vehicle warranty.
7-12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of
Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or
death, you should immediately inform the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),
in addition to notifying Saturn Corporation.
Transport Canada
Road Safety Branch
2780 Sheffield Road
Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it could
open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety
defect exists in a group of vehicles, it could
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your retailer or Saturn
Corporation.
Reporting Safety Defects to Saturn
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in
a situation like this, please notify Saturn.
Call 1-800-553-6000, or write:
Saturn Corporation
100 Saturn Parkway
Mail Drop 371-999-S24
Spring Hill, TN 37174-1500
To contact NHTSA, call the Vehicle Safety Hotline
toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA
400 Seventh Street, SW.
Washington D.C., 20590
In Canada, call 1-800-263-1999, or write:
Saturn Customer Communication Centre
General Motors of Canada Limited
CA1-163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
7-13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
In Canada, information relating to product service
bulletins can be obtained by contacting your
Saturn retailer.
Service Publications Ordering
Information
Service Bulletins
Service Manuals
Saturn regularly sends its retailers useful service
bulletins about Saturn products. Saturn monitors product
performance in the field. We then prepare bulletins for
servicing our products better. You can get these
bulletins, too.
A variety of publications are available to you. Saturn
service manuals are written for trained technicians, and
in some cases, specialized tools and equipment are
necessary to complete certain repairs. However,
the manuals are available to owners who either have
the training, or wish to gain a greater understanding of
the technical aspect of their Saturn.
Bulletins cover various subjects. Some pertain to the
proper use and care of your vehicle. Some describe
costly repairs. Others describe inexpensive repairs
which, if done on time with the latest parts, may avoid
future costly repairs.
For additional publications information or to order
publications in the United States, call toll free
1-800-2-SATURN or visit www.saturn-publications.com
to order on-line.
Some bulletins tell a technician how to repair a new or
unexpected condition. Others describe a quicker
way to fix your vehicle. They can help a technician
service your vehicle better.
In Canada, Saturn service manuals are available by
calling toll free 1-800-551-4123.
Owner Publications
Most bulletins apply to conditions affecting a small
number of vehicles. Your Saturn retailer or a qualified
technician may have to determine if a specific
bulletin applies to your vehicle. To order Saturn bulletins,
call Saturn Publications at 1-800-2-SATURN or visit
www.saturn-publications.com to order online.
Information on how to obtain product bulletins and as
described below is applicable only in the fifty U.S. states
and the District of Columbia, and only for cars and light
trucks with a Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) less
than 10,000 pounds (4 536 kg). Copies of individual
bulletins are also at your participating Saturn retailer.
You can ask to see them.
7-14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Event Data Recorders
Vehicle Data Recording and
Privacy
This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or
near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment
or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The
EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
Your Saturn vehicle has a number of sophisticated
computers that record information about the vehicle’s
performance and how it is driven. For example,
your vehicle uses computer modules to monitor and
control engine and transmission performance, to monitor
the conditions for airbag deployment and deploy
airbags in a crash and, if so equipped, to provide
antilock braking to help the driver control the vehicle.
These modules may store data to help your
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating
dealer/retailer technician service your vehicle. Some
modules may also store data about how you operate the
vehicle, such as rate of fuel consumption or average
speed. These modules may also retain the owner’s
personal preferences, such as radio pre-sets, seat
positions, and temperature settings.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety
belts were buckled/fastened
• How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the
accelerator and/or brake pedal
• How fast the vehicle was traveling
This data can help provide a better understanding of the
circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
Important: EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data is
recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions
and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,
and crash location) is recorded. However, other parties,
such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR
data with the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
7-15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other
parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they have
access to the vehicle or the EDR.
Navigation System
If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the
system may result in the storage of destinations,
addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip
information. Refer to the navigation system operating
manual for information on stored data and for deletion
instructions.
Saturn will not access this data or share it with others
except: with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if
the vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee; in
response to an official request of police or similar
government office; as part of Saturn’s defense of
litigation through the discovery process; or, as required
by law. Data that Saturn collects or receives may
also be used for Saturn research needs or may be made
available to others for research purposes, where a
need is shown and the data is not tied to a specific
vehicle or vehicle owner.
Radio Frequency Identification
(RFID)
RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions
such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system
security, as well as in connection with conveniences
such as key fobs for remote door locking/unlocking and
starting, and in-vehicle transmitters for garage door
openers. RFID technology in Saturn vehicles does not
use or record personal information or link with any other
Saturn system containing personal information.
OnStar®
If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the
OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and
Conditions for information on data collection and
manual for more information.
7-16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-62
Bulb Replacement (cont.)
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Customer Assistance Information (cont.)
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Electrical System (cont.)
Underhood Fuse Block ................................. 5-93
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
N
Navigation System, Privacy .............................. 7-16
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
S
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
RCA Cordless Telephone 27910 User Guide
Reebok Watch W 108 User Guide
Rolls Music Mixer SX45 User Guide
Rolls Power Supply PS16 User Guide
Rosewill Beverage Dispenser RCX Z775 LX User Guide
Ryobi Saw P530 User Guide
Sanyo Flat Panel Television DP50749 User Guide
Schneider Electric Washer V334 User Guide
SECO LARM USA Power Supply EVP 1SA4P4UL User Guide
Senco Power Screwdriver DS200 AC User Guide